cbklib

Check-in [d779a931b1]
Login

Many hyperlinks are disabled.
Use anonymous login to enable hyperlinks.

Overview
Comment:Add more libs
Timelines: family | ancestors | descendants | both | trunk
Files: files | file ages | folders
SHA1:d779a931b17fcf56fd95aa8cfa7f7097ef72c720
User & Date: admin 2015-06-28 20:59:58
Context
2015-06-28
21:10
Add more libs check-in: 5362800858 user: admin tags: trunk
20:59
Add more libs check-in: d779a931b1 user: admin tags: trunk
01:22
Updates to softwareupdate and regproc packages check-in: 4434b6dc01 user: admin tags: trunk
Changes
Hide Diffs Side-by-Side Diffs Ignore Whitespace Patch

Added aquahig/README.txt.

            1  +The Aquahig package
            2  +
            3  +The aquahig package implements some Mac OS X-specific configurations to selected Tk megawidgets to make them better fit in visually with Mac interface conventions, similar to iTunes and other Mac applications. Currently supported widgets are the BWidgets Tree, the BWidgets ListBox, and Tablelist. 
            4  +
            5  +Using the Aquahig Package
            6  +
            7  +The aquahig package is invoked by calling package require aquahig. It implements Mac styling for widgets in the form of arrays: 
            8  +
            9  +* aquahig::treeopts: These options add a Mac-style "disclosure triangle" to the BWidget Tree, remove the lines for tree nodes (which is more charactertistic of Windows), and add a light blue background and a blue highlight foreground (similar to iTunes). They also specify the correct font size and spacing. 
           10  +
           11  +* aquahig::listopts: These options add a light blue background and a blue highlight foreground (similar to iTunes) to the BWidget ListBox. They also specify the correct font size and spacing. 
           12  +
           13  +* aquahig::tableopts: These options add a light blue stripe, a blue highlight foreground color, and vertical rules (similar to iTunes) to TableList. 
           14  +
           15  +Usage of the package would look something like this: 
           16  +
           17  +foreach {key value} [array get aquahig::treeopts] { 
           18  +$w configure -$key $value 
           19  +} 
           20  +
           21  +Note: the aquahig package depends on the TkImg or TkPNG packages, as the Mac-style disclosure triangles are pngs. To use another image format, such as .gif, you will need to edit the source code accordingly. 
           22  +
           23  +License
           24  +
           25  +The aquahig package is licensed under the same license as Tcl/Tk itself. See http://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/license.html for the current license. 

Added aquahig/aquahig.tcl.

            1  +#aquahig: provides sane OS X UI configs for BWidget Tree, BWidget ListBox, and Tablelist. (c) 2007 WordTech Communications LLC. License: standard Tcl license, http://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/license.html
            2  +
            3  +package provide aquahig 1.2
            4  +
            5  +namespace eval aquahig {
            6  +
            7  +    if {![info exists library]} {
            8  +	variable library [file dirname [info script]]
            9  +    }
           10  +
           11  +
           12  +
           13  +## usage, cf for BWidget Tree: 
           14  +##        foreach {key value} [array get aquahig::treeopts] {
           15  +##               $w configure -$key $value
           16  +##          }
           17  +
           18  +##create Mac-style "disclosure triangle" for tree view
           19  +    image create bitmap hig_triangleright -file [file join $aquahig::library triangleright.xbm]
           20  +    image create bitmap hig_triangledown -file [file join $aquahig::library triangledown.xbm]
           21  +
           22  +
           23  +
           24  +##configuration options for BWidget Tree
           25  +    array set [namespace current]::treeopts {
           26  +
           27  +	selectbackground   #84a6cb
           28  +	selectforeground   white
           29  +	deltay             17
           30  +	showlines	   0
           31  +	crossopenimage	   hig_triangledown
           32  +	crosscloseimage    hig_triangleright
           33  +	background         #e3e9f1
           34  +	highlightcolor     #e3e9f1 
           35  +	highlightthickness .1
           36  +	relief             flat
           37  +	selectfill         1
           38  +	borderwidth        0
           39  +
           40  +    }
           41  +
           42  +##configuration options for Bwidget ListBox    
           43  +    array set [namespace current]::listopts {
           44  +
           45  +	selectbackground  #84a6cb
           46  +	selectforeground   white
           47  +	deltay             21
           48  +	background         #e3e9f1 
           49  +	highlightcolor     #e3e9f1 
           50  +	relief             flat
           51  +	selectfill         1
           52  +
           53  +    }
           54  +
           55  + ##configuration options for Tablelist
           56  +    array set [namespace current]::tableopts {
           57  +
           58  +	selectbackground   RoyalBlue1
           59  +	selectforeground   white
           60  +	stretch	           all
           61  +	stripebackground   #EDF3FE
           62  +	relief             flat
           63  +	border             0
           64  +	showseparators     yes
           65  +	takefocus          0
           66  +        setfocus           1
           67  +        activestyle        none
           68  +    }
           69  +
           70  +    namespace export *
           71  +}

Added aquahig/pkgIndex.tcl.

            1  +# Tcl package index file, version 1.1
            2  +# This file is generated by the "pkg_mkIndex" command
            3  +# and sourced either when an application starts up or
            4  +# by a "package unknown" script.  It invokes the
            5  +# "package ifneeded" command to set up package-related
            6  +# information so that packages will be loaded automatically
            7  +# in response to "package require" commands.  When this
            8  +# script is sourced, the variable $dir must contain the
            9  +# full path name of this file's directory.
           10  +
           11  +package ifneeded aquahig 1.2 [list source [file join $dir aquahig.tcl]]

Added aquahig/triangledown.xbm.

            1  +#define triangledown_width 13
            2  +#define triangledown_height 13
            3  +static unsigned char triangledown_bits[] = {
            4  +   0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0xf8, 0x03, 0xf8, 0x03, 0xf8, 0x03,
            5  +   0xf0, 0x01, 0xf0, 0x01, 0xe0, 0x00, 0x60, 0x00, 0x40, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
            6  +   0x00, 0x00 };

Added aquahig/triangleright.xbm.

            1  +#define triangleright_width 13
            2  +#define triangleright_height 13
            3  +static unsigned char triangleright_bits[] = {
            4  +   0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x0c, 0x00, 0x7c, 0x00, 0xfc, 0x00,
            5  +   0xfc, 0x03, 0xfc, 0x00, 0x7c, 0x00, 0x1c, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
            6  +   0x00, 0x00 };

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ArrowButton.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>ArrowButton</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>ArrowButton</B>
            6  + - Button widget with an arrow shape.
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ArrowButton</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activebackground">-activebackground</A></TR>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activeforeground">-activeforeground</A></TR>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TR>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
           26  +</TR>
           27  +<TR>
           28  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TR>
           29  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TR>
           30  +</TR>
           31  +<TR>
           32  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TR>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
           34  +</TR>
           35  +<TR>
           36  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TR>
           38  +</TR>
           39  +<TR>
           40  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR>
           41  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR>
           42  +</TR>
           43  +</TABLE></DD>
           44  +</DL>
           45  +<DL>
           46  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           47  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           48  +<TR>
           49  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-armcommand">-armcommand</A></TR>
           50  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-arrowbd">-arrowbd</A></TR>
           51  +</TR>
           52  +<TR>
           53  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-arrowrelief">-arrowrelief</A></TR>
           54  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-clean">-clean</A></TR>
           55  +</TR>
           56  +<TR>
           57  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
           58  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dir">-dir</A></TR>
           59  +</TR>
           60  +<TR>
           61  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-disarmcommand">-disarmcommand</A></TR>
           62  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
           63  +</TR>
           64  +<TR>
           65  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TR>
           66  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TR>
           67  +</TR>
           68  +<TR>
           69  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TR>
           70  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipadx">-ipadx</A></TR>
           71  +</TR>
           72  +<TR>
           73  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipady">-ipady</A></TR>
           74  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR>
           75  +</TR>
           76  +<TR>
           77  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
           78  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
           79  +</TR>
           80  +</TABLE></DD>
           81  +</DL>
           82  +<DL>
           83  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           84  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           85  + <I>option</I>
           86  +</DD>
           87  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           88  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           89  +</DD>
           90  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
           91  +</DD>
           92  +</DL>
           93  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           94  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           95  +<P>
           96  +
           97  +ArrowButton can be of two types following <B>type</B> option:
           98  +for <B>button</B> type, it is standard button with an arrow drawn on it;
           99  +for <B>arrow</B> type, it is an arrow like scrollbar's arrow.
          100  +</P>
          101  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          102  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
          103  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-armcommand"><B>-armcommand</B></A></DT>
          104  +<DD>
          105  +
          106  +Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton when mouse button 1 is pressed
          107  +over the ArrowButton. When <B>repeatdelay</B> or <B>repeatinterval</B> option is positive
          108  +integer, this command is repeatedly called if mouse pointer is over the button and until
          109  +mouse button 1 is released.
          110  +</DD>
          111  +</DL>
          112  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-arrowbd"><B>-arrowbd</B></A></DT>
          113  +<DD>
          114  +
          115  +When ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>, specifies the border width of the
          116  +arrow. Must be 1 or 2.
          117  +
          118  +</DD>
          119  +</DL>
          120  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-arrowrelief"><B>-arrowrelief</B></A></DT>
          121  +<DD>
          122  +
          123  +When ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>, specifies the relief of the arrow.
          124  +Must be <B>raised</B> or <B>sunken</B>.
          125  +
          126  +</DD>
          127  +</DL>
          128  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-clean"><B>-clean</B></A></DT>
          129  +<DD>
          130  +
          131  +Specifies a level of quality, between 0 and 2, for the arrow.
          132  +If 0, the arrow is drawn with its maximum width and height.
          133  +If 1, the base of arrow is arranged to be odd to have same edges.
          134  +If 2, the base of arrow is arranged to be odd and the orthogonal to be (base+1)/2 to
          135  +have 'straight' diagonal for edges.
          136  +</DD>
          137  +</DL>
          138  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
          139  +<DD>
          140  +
          141  +Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton.  This command
          142  +is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the ArrowButton
          143  +window.
          144  +</DD>
          145  +</DL>
          146  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dir"><B>-dir</B></A></DT>
          147  +<DD>
          148  +
          149  +Specifies the direction of the arrow: <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B>, <B>left</B>
          150  +or <B>right</B>.
          151  +</DD>
          152  +</DL>
          153  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-disarmcommand"><B>-disarmcommand</B></A></DT>
          154  +<DD>
          155  +
          156  +Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton when mouse button 1 is released.
          157  +This command is called even if pointer is not over the ArrowButton, and always before
          158  +the command specified by <B>command</B> option.
          159  +It is typically used in conjuntion with <B>armcommand</B>, <B>repeatdelay</B> and
          160  +<B>repeatinterval</B>.
          161  +</DD>
          162  +</DL>
          163  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
          164  +<DD>
          165  +
          166  +Specifies a desired height for the ArrowButton. The value is in screen units.
          167  +</DD>
          168  +</DL>
          169  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
          170  +<DD>
          171  +
          172  +Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
          173  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          174  +</DD>
          175  +</DL>
          176  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
          177  +<DD>
          178  +Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
          179  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          180  +</DD>
          181  +</DL>
          182  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
          183  +<DD>
          184  +Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
          185  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          186  +</DD>
          187  +</DL>
          188  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipadx"><B>-ipadx</B></A></DT>
          189  +<DD>
          190  +
          191  +Specifies a minimun pad between the ArrowButton border and the right and left side
          192  +of the arrow. The value is in screen units.
          193  +</DD>
          194  +</DL>
          195  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipady"><B>-ipady</B></A></DT>
          196  +<DD>
          197  +
          198  +Specifies a minimun pad between the ArrowButton border and the top and bottom side
          199  +of the arrow. The value is in screen units.
          200  +</DD>
          201  +</DL>
          202  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
          203  +<DD>
          204  +
          205  +Specifies one of three states for the ArrowButton: <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>,
          206  +or <B>disabled</B>.
          207  +<DL><DT>If ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>button</I>:</DT>
          208  +<DD>In normal state the ArrowButton is displayed using the
          209  +<B>foreground</B> and <B>background</B> options. The active state is
          210  +typically used when the pointer is over the ArrowButton. In active state
          211  +the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>activeforeground</B> and
          212  +<B>activebackground</B> options. In disabled state the <B>disabledforeground</B> and
          213  +<B>background</B> options determine how the ArrowButton is displayed.
          214  +</DD>
          215  +<DT>If ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>:</DT>
          216  +<DD>Only colors of arrow change. The background of ArrowButton is always
          217  +displayed using <B>troughcolor</B> option.
          218  +In normal state the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>background</B> option. The active
          219  +state is typically used when the pointer is over the ArrowButton. In active state
          220  +the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>activebackground</B> option. In disabled state
          221  +the ArrowButton is displayed with a dark stipple.
          222  +</DD>
          223  +</DL>
          224  +Disabled state means that the ArrowButton
          225  +should be insensitive: the default bindings will refuse to activate
          226  +the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
          227  +</DD>
          228  +</DL>
          229  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
          230  +<DD>
          231  +
          232  +Determines the type of the ArrowButton: <B>button</B> for standard button look, or
          233  +<B>arrow</B> scrollbar's arrow look.
          234  +</DD>
          235  +</DL>
          236  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
          237  +<DD>
          238  +
          239  +Specifies a desired width for the ArrowButton. The value is in screen units.
          240  +</DD>
          241  +</DL>
          242  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          243  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          244  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          245  + <I>option</I>
          246  +</DT><DD>
          247  +
          248  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          249  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          250  +</DD></DL>
          251  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          252  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          253  +</DT><DD>
          254  +
          255  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          256  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          257  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          258  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          259  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          260  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          261  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          262  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          263  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          264  +
          265  +</DD></DL>
          266  +<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
          267  +</DT><DD>
          268  +
          269  +If ArrowButton <B>state</B> is not disabled, this invoke the commands of the button.
          270  +ArrowButton is redisplayed with active color and sunken relief, and
          271  +<B>armcommand</B> is called. Then ArrowButton is redisplayed with
          272  +normal color and its defined relief, and <B>disarmcommand</B> then <B>command</B>
          273  +are called.
          274  +<P><B>invoke</B> is called when ArrowButton has input focus and user press the space bar.
          275  +</DD></DL>
          276  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/BWidget.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>BWidget</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<IMG SRC="constr.gif" WIDTH="40" HEIGHT="40"> Under construction ...<BR>
            5  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            6  +<DD><B>BWidget</B>
            7  + - Description text
            8  +</DD></DL>
            9  +<DL>
           10  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           11  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#XLFDfont"><B>XLFDfont</B></A>
           12  + <I>cmd</I>
           13  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
           14  +</DD>
           15  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#assert"><B>assert</B></A>
           16  + <I>exp</I>
           17  + ?<I>msg</I>?
           18  +</DD>
           19  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#badOptionString"><B>badOptionString</B></A>
           20  + <I>type</I>
           21  + <I>value</I>
           22  + <I>list</I>
           23  +</DD>
           24  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#bindMouseWheel"><B>bindMouseWheel</B></A>
           25  + <I>widget</I>
           26  +</DD>
           27  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#classes"><B>classes</B></A>
           28  + <I>class</I>
           29  +</DD>
           30  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#clonename"><B>clonename</B></A>
           31  + <I>menu</I>
           32  +</DD>
           33  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#focus"><B>focus</B></A>
           34  + <I>option</I>
           35  + <I>path</I>
           36  +</DD>
           37  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#get3dcolor"><B>get3dcolor</B></A>
           38  + <I>path</I>
           39  + <I>bgcolor</I>
           40  +</DD>
           41  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#getname"><B>getname</B></A>
           42  + <I>name</I>
           43  +</DD>
           44  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#grab"><B>grab</B></A>
           45  + <I>option</I>
           46  + <I>path</I>
           47  +</DD>
           48  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#inuse"><B>inuse</B></A>
           49  + <I>class</I>
           50  +</DD>
           51  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#library"><B>library</B></A>
           52  + <I>class</I> ?<i>class ...</i>?
           53  +</DD>
           54  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#lreorder"><B>lreorder</B></A>
           55  + <I>list</I>
           56  + <I>neworder</I>
           57  +</DD>
           58  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#parsetext"><B>parsetext</B></A>
           59  + <I>text</I>
           60  +</DD>
           61  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#place"><B>place</B></A>
           62  + <I>path</I>
           63  + <I>w</I>
           64  + <I>h</I>
           65  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
           66  +</DD>
           67  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#write"><B>write</B></A>
           68  + <I>filename</I> ?<i>mode</i>?
           69  +</DD>
           70  +<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#wrongNumArgsString"><B>wrongNumArgsString</B></A>
           71  + <I>string</I>
           72  +</DD>
           73  +</DL>
           74  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           75  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           76  +<P>
           77  +Description text
           78  +</P>
           79  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           80  +<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
           81  +<DL><DT><A NAME="XLFDfont">BWidget::<B>XLFDfont</B></A>
           82  + <I>cmd</I>
           83  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
           84  +</DT><DD>
           85  +Description text
           86  +</DD></DL>
           87  +<DL><DT><A NAME="assert">BWidget::<B>assert</B></A>
           88  + <I>exp</I>
           89  + ?<I>msg</I>?
           90  +</DT><DD>
           91  +Description text
           92  +</DD></DL>
           93  +<DL><DT><A NAME="badOptionString">BWidget::<B>badOptionString</B></A>
           94  + <I>type</I>
           95  + <I>value</I>
           96  + <I>list</I>
           97  +</DT><DD>
           98  +Return a proper error string for a <i>value</i> of <i>type</i> that doesn't
           99  +match <i>list</i>.
          100  +</DD></DL>
          101  +
          102  +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindMouseWheel">BWidget::<B>bindMouseWheel</B></A>
          103  + <I>widget</I>
          104  +</DT><DD>
          105  +    Bind the given <i>widget</i> with the standard mouse wheel bindings.
          106  +</DD></DL>
          107  +
          108  +<DL><DT><A NAME="classes">BWidget::<B>classes</B></A>
          109  + <I>class</I>
          110  +</DT><DD>
          111  +    Returns a list of classes needed by the given <i>class</i>.
          112  +</DD></DL>
          113  +
          114  +<DL><DT><A NAME="clonename">BWidget::<B>clonename</B></A>
          115  + <I>menu</I>
          116  +</DT><DD>
          117  +Description text
          118  +</DD></DL>
          119  +<DL><DT><A NAME="focus">BWidget::<B>focus</B></A>
          120  + <I>option</I>
          121  + <I>path</I>
          122  +</DT><DD>
          123  +Description text
          124  +</DD></DL>
          125  +<DL><DT><A NAME="get3dcolor">BWidget::<B>get3dcolor</B></A>
          126  + <I>path</I>
          127  + <I>bgcolor</I>
          128  +</DT><DD>
          129  +Description text
          130  +</DD></DL>
          131  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getname">BWidget::<B>getname</B></A>
          132  + <I>name</I>
          133  +</DT><DD>
          134  +Description text
          135  +</DD></DL>
          136  +<DL><DT><A NAME="grab">BWidget::<B>grab</B></A>
          137  + <I>option</I>
          138  + <I>path</I>
          139  +</DT><DD>
          140  +Description text
          141  +</DD></DL>
          142  +
          143  +<DL><DT><A NAME="inuse">BWidget::<B>inuse</B></A>
          144  + <I>class</I>
          145  +</DT><DD>
          146  +    Returns true or false if the given <i>class</i> is being used by the
          147  +    current running program.
          148  +</DD></DL>
          149  +
          150  +<DL><DT><A NAME="library">BWidget::<B>library</B></A>
          151  + <I>class</I>
          152  + ?<i>class ...</i>?
          153  +</DT><DD>
          154  +    Returns a string of code that contains all the libraries needed to
          155  +    use the widgets given by <i>class</i>.  Each class's code and the
          156  +    code of its dependent classes is appended to the string and returned.
          157  +    This is mostly useful for saving BWidgets to another project.
          158  +</DD></DL>
          159  +
          160  +<DL><DT><A NAME="lreorder">BWidget::<B>lreorder</B></A>
          161  + <I>list</I>
          162  + <I>neworder</I>
          163  +</DT><DD>
          164  +Description text
          165  +</DD></DL>
          166  +<DL><DT><A NAME="parsetext">BWidget::<B>parsetext</B></A>
          167  + <I>text</I>
          168  +</DT><DD>
          169  +Description text
          170  +</DD></DL>
          171  +<DL><DT><A NAME="place">BWidget::<B>place</B></A>
          172  + <I>path</I>
          173  + <I>w</I>
          174  + <I>h</I>
          175  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          176  +</DT><DD>
          177  +Used to position and resize the widget specified by
          178  +<I>path</I>. <I>w</I> and <I>h</I> are used to specify the requested
          179  +width and height of the <I>path</I> widget for use by <B>wm
          180  +geometry</B> (set to 0 to use current values). The placement of the widget relative to other widgets or
          181  +the screen is controlled by additional arguments:
          182  +<DL>
          183  + <DT><B>at</B> <I>x</I> <I>y</I></DT>
          184  + <DD>Place the widget specified by the <I>path</I> argument at screen
          185  + position x,y. See <B>wm geometry</B> for information about window
          186  + placement values.</DD>
          187  +
          188  + <DT><B>center</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
          189  + <DD>Place the <I>path</I> widget centered against <I>widget</I> or against the
          190  + root widget if <I>widget</I> is not given.</DD>
          191  +
          192  + <DT><B>left</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
          193  + <DT><B>right</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
          194  + <DD>Place the <I>path</I> widget either left or right of the
          195  + reference widget (or the root widget if <I>widget</I> is not
          196  + specified). If the reference widget's position is such that the newly
          197  + placed window might be obscured then the opposite side will be tried.</DD>
          198  +
          199  + <DT><B>above</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
          200  + <DT><B>below</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
          201  + <DD>As for left/right above, this option causes the widget to be
          202  + placed either above or below the reference widget with the opposite
          203  + placement being attempted if the newly placed widget will not be visible.
          204  +</DL>
          205  +</DL>
          206  +
          207  +<DL><DT><A NAME="write">BWidget::<B>write</B></A>
          208  + <I>filename</I>
          209  + ?<i>mode</i>?
          210  +</DT><DD>
          211  +    Writes the currently used set of BWidget class code to the given
          212  +    <i>filename</i>.  All the code necessary to run the BWidgets
          213  +    currently in use is written to the file.  This is mostly useful
          214  +    for saving BWidget code to another project as a single file instead
          215  +    of the entire BWidget package.
          216  +</DD></DL>
          217  +
          218  +<DL>
          219  +<DT><A NAME="wrongNumArgsString">BWidget::<B>wrongNumArgsString</B></A>
          220  + <I>string</I>
          221  +</DT>
          222  +<DD>
          223  +    Returns a standard error string for the wrong number of arguments.
          224  +    <i>string</i> is appended to the standard string.
          225  +</DD>
          226  +</DL>
          227  +
          228  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Button.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>Button</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>Button</B>
            6  + - Button widget with enhanced options
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Button</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
           15  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           16  +<TR>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activebackground">-activebackground</A></TD>
           18  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activeforeground">-activeforeground</A></TD>
           19  +</TR>
           20  +<TR>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TD>
           22  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           23  +</TD>
           24  +<TR>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TD>
           26  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           27  +</TR>
           28  +<TR>
           29  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
           30  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TD>
           31  +</TR>
           32  +<TR>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
           35  +</TD>
           36  +<TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
           38  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
           39  +</TR>
           40  +<TR>
           41  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
           42  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TD>
           43  +</TR>
           44  +<TR>
           45  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
           46  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD>
           47  +</TR>
           48  +<TR>
           49  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TD>
           50  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TD>
           51  +</TR>
           52  +<TR>
           53  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TD>
           54  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
           55  +</TR>
           56  +<TR>
           57  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
           58  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
           59  +</TR>
           60  +<TR>
           61  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TD>
           62  +</TABLE></DD>
           63  +<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
           64  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           65  +<TR>
           66  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-compound">-compound</A></TD>
           67  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
           68  +</TR>
           69  +<TR>
           70  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TD>
           71  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-style">-style</A></TD>
           72  +</TR>
           73  +<TR>
           74  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TD>
           75  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TD>
           76  +</TR>
           77  +<TR>
           78  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
           79  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
           80  +</TR>
           81  +<TR>
           82  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
           83  +</TABLE></DD>
           84  +</DL>
           85  +<DL>
           86  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           87  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           88  +<TR>
           89  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-armcommand">-armcommand</A></TD>
           90  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TD>
           91  +</TR>
           92  +<TR>
           93  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TD>
           94  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-disarmcommand">-disarmcommand</A></TD>
           95  +</TR>
           96  +<TR>
           97  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
           98  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TD>
           99  +</TR>
          100  +<TR>
          101  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TD>
          102  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TD>
          103  +</TR>
          104  +<TR>
          105  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-name">-name</A></TD>
          106  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-relief">-relief</A></TD>
          107  +</TR>
          108  +<TR>
          109  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TD>
          110  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-underline">-underline</A></TD>
          111  +</TR>
          112  +<TR>
          113  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
          114  +</TABLE></DD>
          115  +</DL>
          116  +<DL>
          117  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
          118  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
          119  + <I>option</I>
          120  +</DD>
          121  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
          122  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          123  +</DD>
          124  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
          125  +</DD>
          126  +</DL>
          127  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
          128  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
          129  +<P>
          130  +
          131  +Button widget extends the Tk button with new options.
          132  +<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options,
          133  +a new relief style, callback for <B>arm</B>/<B>disarm</B>, and
          134  +<B>repeatdelay</B>/<B>repeatinterval</B> options has been added.
          135  +</P>
          136  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          137  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
          138  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-armcommand"><B>-armcommand</B></A></DT>
          139  +<DD>
          140  +
          141  +Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button when mouse button 1 is pressed over the
          142  +Button. When <B>repeatdelay</B> or <B>repeatinterval</B> option is positive integer,
          143  +this command is repeatedly called if mouse pointer is over the Button and until mouse
          144  +button 1 is released.
          145  +</DD>
          146  +</DL>
          147  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
          148  +<DD>
          149  +
          150  +Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button.  This command
          151  +is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the Button
          152  +window.
          153  +</DD>
          154  +</DL>
          155  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT>
          156  +<DD>
          157  +
          158  +Specifies one of three states for the default ring: <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>,
          159  +or <B>disabled</B>. In active state, the button is drawn with the platform specific
          160  +appearance for a default button. In normal state, the button is drawn with the platform
          161  +specific appearance for a non-default button, leaving enough space to draw the default
          162  +button appearance. The normal and active states will result in buttons of the same size.
          163  +In disabled state, the button is drawn with the non-default button appearance without
          164  +leaving space for the default appearance. The disabled state may result
          165  +in a smaller button than the active state.
          166  +</DD>
          167  +</DL>
          168  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-disarmcommand"><B>-disarmcommand</B></A></DT>
          169  +<DD>
          170  +
          171  +Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button when mouse button 1 is released.
          172  +This command is called even if pointer is not over the Button, and always before
          173  +the command specified by <B>command</B> option.
          174  +It is typically used in conjuntion with <B>armcommand</B>, <B>repeatdelay</B> and
          175  +<B>repeatinterval</B>.
          176  +</DD>
          177  +</DL>
          178  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
          179  +<DD>
          180  +
          181  +Specifies a desired height for the Button.
          182  +If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the Button then the value is in
          183  +screen units;
          184  +for text it is in lines of text.
          185  +If this option isn't specified, the Button's desired height is computed
          186  +from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.<BR>
          187  +Option not available when widget is <I>themed</I>.
          188  +</DD>
          189  +</DL>
          190  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
          191  +<DD>
          192  +
          193  +Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
          194  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          195  +</DD>
          196  +</DL>
          197  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
          198  +<DD>
          199  +Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
          200  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          201  +</DD>
          202  +</DL>
          203  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
          204  +<DD>
          205  +Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
          206  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          207  +</DD>
          208  +</DL>
          209  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-name"><B>-name</B></A></DT>
          210  +<DD>
          211  +
          212  +Specifies a standard name for the button. If the option <B>*<I>name</I>Name</B> is
          213  +found in the resources database, then <B>text</B> and <B>underline</B> options
          214  +are extracted from its value.
          215  +
          216  +</DD>
          217  +</DL>
          218  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-relief"><B>-relief</B></A></DT>
          219  +<DD>
          220  +
          221  +Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget. Acceptable values are standard values for
          222  +button relief (<B>raised</B>, <B>sunken</B>, <B>flat</B>, <B>ridge</B>, <B>solid</B>, and <B>groove</B>) and <B>link</B>, which specifies that button relief is <B>flat</B> when pointer
          223  +is outside the button and <B>raised</B> when pointer is inside.<BR>
          224  +This option has only the following effect if the widget is <I>themed</I>:
          225  +The value <B>link</B> used a style <B>Toolbutton</B> while any other value uses the standard effect.
          226  +</DD>
          227  +</DL>
          228  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
          229  +<DD>
          230  +
          231  +Specifies one of three states for the Button:  <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>,
          232  +or <B>disabled</B>.  In normal state the Button is displayed using the
          233  +<B>foreground</B> and <B>background</B> options.  The active state is
          234  +typically used when the pointer is over the Button.  In active state
          235  +the Button is displayed using the <B>activeforeground</B> and
          236  +<B>activebackground</B> options.  Disabled state means that the Button
          237  +should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
          238  +the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
          239  +In this state the <B>disabledforeground</B> and
          240  +<B>background</B> options determine how the Button is displayed.
          241  +</DD>
          242  +</DL>
          243  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-underline"><B>-underline</B></A></DT>
          244  +<DD>
          245  +
          246  +Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the label of the button.
          247  +0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed, 1 to the next character,
          248  +and so on.
          249  +<BR>The binding <B>&lt;Alt-<I>char</I>&gt;</B> is automatically set on the toplevel
          250  +of the Button to call Button::<B>setfocus</B>.
          251  +
          252  +</DD>
          253  +</DL>
          254  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
          255  +<DD>
          256  +
          257  +If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the Button then the value is in
          258  +screen units;
          259  +for text it is in characters.
          260  +If this option isn't specified, the Button's desired width is computed
          261  +from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
          262  +</DD>
          263  +</DL>
          264  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          265  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          266  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          267  + <I>option</I>
          268  +</DT><DD>
          269  +
          270  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          271  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          272  +</DD></DL>
          273  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          274  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          275  +</DT><DD>
          276  +
          277  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          278  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          279  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          280  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          281  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          282  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          283  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          284  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          285  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          286  +
          287  +</DD></DL>
          288  +<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
          289  +</DT><DD>
          290  +
          291  +If Button <B>state</B> is not disabled, this invoke the commands of the Button.
          292  +Button is redisplayed with active color and sunken relief, and
          293  +<B>armcommand</B> is called. Then Button is redisplayed with
          294  +normal color and its defined relief, and <B>disarmcommand</B> then <B>command</B>
          295  +are called.
          296  +<P><B>invoke</B> is called when Button has input focus and user press the space bar.
          297  +
          298  +</DD></DL>
          299  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          300  +<B><A NAME="wc">BINDINGS</A></B><BR>
          301  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Invoke"><I>&lt;&lt;Invoke&gt;&gt;</I></A>
          302  +</DT><DD>
          303  +
          304  +Invoke the <B>invoke</B> widget command.
          305  +</DD></DL>
          306  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          307  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ButtonBox.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>ButtonBox</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>ButtonBox</B>
            6  + - Set of buttons with horizontal or vertical layout
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ButtonBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TR>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-homogeneous">-homogeneous</A></TD>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-orient">-orient</A></TR>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-pady">-pady</A></TR>
           26  +</TR>
           27  +<TR>
           28  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-spacing">-spacing</A></TD>
           29  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR>
           30  +</TABLE></DD>
           31  +</DL>
           32  +<DL>
           33  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           34  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
           35  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
           36  +</DD>
           37  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           38  + <I>option</I>
           39  +</DD>
           40  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           41  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           42  +</DD>
           43  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
           44  + <I>index</I>
           45  +</DD>
           46  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
           47  + <I>index</I>
           48  +</DD>
           49  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
           50  +  <i>index</i> ?<I>option value...</I>?
           51  +</DD>
           52  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
           53  + <I>index</I>
           54  +</DD>
           55  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
           56  + <I>index</I>
           57  + <I>option</I>
           58  +</DD>
           59  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
           60  + <I>index</I>
           61  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           62  +</DD>
           63  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A>
           64  + <I>index</I>
           65  +</DD>
           66  +</DL>
           67  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           68  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           69  +<P>
           70  +
           71  +ButtonBox layouts Button horizontally or vertically.
           72  +Some commands take an <I>index</I> as argument indicating on which
           73  +Button it work. This index may be specified in any of the following forms:
           74  +<P>
           75  +<DL COMPACT>
           76  +<DT>
           77  +<I>number</I>
           78  +<DD>
           79  +Specifies the Button numerically, where 0 corresponds
           80  +to the first added Button, 1 to the next, and so on.
           81  +<DT>
           82  +<B>end</B> or <B>last</B>
           83  +<DD>
           84  +Indicates the last item added.
           85  +<DT><B>default</B>
           86  +<DD>
           87  +Indicates the default Button.
           88  +
           89  +<DT>
           90  +<i>name</i>
           91  +<DD>
           92  +Indicates the button whose <b>-name</b> option is <i>name</i>.
           93  +
           94  +<DT>
           95  +<i>text</i>
           96  +<DD>
           97  +Indicates the button whose <b>-text</b> option is <i>text</i>.
           98  +</DL>
           99  +
          100  +</P>
          101  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          102  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
          103  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-background"><B>-background</B></A></DT>
          104  +<DD>
          105  +
          106  +Specifies a default background color for all added buttons and for the frame.<BR>
          107  +For <I>themed</I> wigets, the button color is not set.
          108  +
          109  +</DD>
          110  +</DL>
          111  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT>
          112  +<DD>
          113  +
          114  +Specifies the default button of the button box. The value is an integer
          115  +referencing the n-th added button, starting from 0.
          116  +If this value is -1 (the default), all button wil be drawn with their -default
          117  +option set to disabled, and this value can not be changed. <BR>If this value is 
          118  +not -1, the associated button is drawn with -default option set to active and
          119  +the others are drawn with -default option set to normal. The value can be changed
          120  +by configure.
          121  +
          122  +</DD>
          123  +</DL>
          124  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-homogeneous"><B>-homogeneous (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          125  +<DD>
          126  +
          127  +Specifies wether or not buttons must have the same width for horizontal layout.
          128  +
          129  +</DD>
          130  +</DL>
          131  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-orient"><B>-orient (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          132  +<DD>
          133  +
          134  +Specifies the orientation of the button box. If this option is <B>horizontal</B>
          135  +(the default), buttons are added from top to bottom. 
          136  +If this option is <B>vertical</B>, buttons are added from left to right.
          137  +
          138  +</DD>
          139  +</DL>
          140  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
          141  +<DD>
          142  +
          143  +Specifies a default value for the -padx option of all added buttons.<BR>
          144  +Option has no effect for <I>themed</I> wigets.
          145  +</DD>
          146  +</DL>
          147  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-pady"><B>-pady</B></A></DT>
          148  +<DD>
          149  +
          150  +Specifies a default value for the -pady option of all added buttons.<BR>
          151  +Option has no effect for <I>themed</I> wigets.
          152  +
          153  +</DD>
          154  +</DL>
          155  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-spacing"><B>-spacing</B></A></DT>
          156  +<DD>
          157  +
          158  +Specifies the default spacing between buttons. This value can be changed before each
          159  +call to <B>add</B>.
          160  +
          161  +</DD>
          162  +</DL>
          163  +
          164  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
          165  +<DD>
          166  +
          167  +Specifies a state for all the buttons in the button box.  Can be any state supported by buttons.
          168  +
          169  +</DD>
          170  +</DL>
          171  +
          172  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          173  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          174  +<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
          175  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
          176  +</DT><DD>
          177  +
          178  +Add a button to the button box.
          179  +<P>
          180  +See <A HREF="Button.html"><B>Button</B></A> for description of options.
          181  +</DD></DL>
          182  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          183  + <I>option</I>
          184  +</DT><DD>
          185  +
          186  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          187  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          188  +</DD></DL>
          189  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          190  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          191  +</DT><DD>
          192  +
          193  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          194  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          195  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          196  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          197  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          198  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          199  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          200  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          201  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          202  +
          203  +</DD></DL>
          204  +
          205  +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
          206  + <I>index</I>
          207  +</DT><DD>
          208  +
          209  +Delete the button at <i>index</i> from the button box.
          210  +
          211  +</DD></DL>
          212  +
          213  +<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
          214  + <I>index</I>
          215  +</DT><DD>
          216  +
          217  +Return the numerical index corresponding to the item.
          218  +
          219  +</DD></DL>
          220  +
          221  +<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
          222  + <I>index</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?
          223  +</DT><DD>
          224  +
          225  +Insert a new button into the button box before the given index.
          226  +
          227  +</DD></DL>
          228  +
          229  +<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
          230  + <I>index</I>
          231  +</DT><DD>
          232  +
          233  +Invoke the Button given by <I>index</I>.
          234  +
          235  +</DD></DL>
          236  +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
          237  + <I>index</I>
          238  + <I>option</I>
          239  +</DT><DD>
          240  +
          241  +Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
          242  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
          243  +
          244  +</DD></DL>
          245  +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
          246  + <I>index</I>
          247  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          248  +</DT><DD>
          249  +
          250  +This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
          251  +options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
          252  +the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
          253  +item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
          254  +in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
          255  +returns a list describing the current options for the item.
          256  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          257  +
          258  +</DD></DL>
          259  +<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A>
          260  + <I>index</I>
          261  +</DT><DD>
          262  +
          263  +Set the focus to the Button given by <I>index</I>.
          264  +
          265  +</DD></DL>
          266  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ComboBox.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>ComboBox</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>ComboBox</B>
            6  + - ComboBox widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ComboBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +</TABLE></DD>
           24  +</DL>
           25  +<DL>
           26  +<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT>
           27  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           28  +<TR>
           29  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-command</TD>
           30  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
           31  +</TR>
           32  +<TR>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragenabled</TD>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragendcmd</TD>
           35  +</TR>
           36  +<TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragevent</TD>
           38  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-draginitcmd</TD>
           39  +</TR>
           40  +<TR>
           41  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragtype</TD>
           42  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropcmd</TD>
           43  +</TR>
           44  +<TR>
           45  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropenabled</TD>
           46  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropovercmd</TD>
           47  +</TR>
           48  +<TR>
           49  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-droptypes</TD>
           50  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-editable</TD>
           51  +</TR>
           52  +<TR>
           53  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD>
           54  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
           55  +</TR>
           56  +<TR>
           57  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
           58  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
           59  +</TR>
           60  +<TR>
           61  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
           62  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
           63  +</TR>
           64  +<TR>
           65  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
           66  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
           67  +</TR>
           68  +<TR>
           69  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
           70  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
           71  +</TR>
           72  +<TR>
           73  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
           74  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
           75  +</TR>
           76  +<TR>
           77  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
           78  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
           79  +</TR>
           80  +<TR>
           81  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
           82  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
           83  +</TR>
           84  +<TR>
           85  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
           86  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
           87  +</TR>
           88  +<TR>
           89  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
           90  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-show</TD>
           91  +</TR>
           92  +<TR>
           93  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
           94  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-takefocus</TD>
           95  +</TR>
           96  +<TR>
           97  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
           98  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
           99  +</TR>
          100  +<TR>
          101  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
          102  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-xscrollcommand</TD>
          103  +</TR>
          104  +</TABLE></DD>
          105  +</DL>
          106  +<DL>
          107  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
          108  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
          109  +<TR>
          110  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-autocomplete">-autocomplete</A></TD>
          111  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-autopost">-autopost</A></TD>
          112  +</TR>
          113  +<TR>
          114  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-bwlistbox">-bwlistbox</A></TD>
          115  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-expand">-expand</A></TD>
          116  +</TR>
          117  +<TR>
          118  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
          119  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-hottrack">-hottrack</A></TD>
          120  +</TR>
          121  +<TR>
          122  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-images">-images</A></TD>
          123  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-listboxwidth">-listboxwidth</A></TD>
          124  +</TR>
          125  +<TR>
          126  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-modifycmd">-modifycmd</A></TD>
          127  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-postcommand">-postcommand</A></TD>
          128  +</TR>
          129  +<TR>
          130  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-values">-values</A></TD>
          131  +</TR>
          132  +</TABLE></DD>
          133  +</DL>
          134  +<DL>
          135  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
          136  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A>
          137  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          138  +</DD>
          139  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
          140  + <I>option</I>
          141  +</DD>
          142  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#clearvalue"><B>clearvalue</B></A>
          143  +</DD>
          144  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
          145  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          146  +</DD>
          147  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#get"><B>get</B></A></DD>
          148  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getentry"><B>getentry</B></A></DD>
          149  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getlistbox"><B>getlistbox</B></A></DD>
          150  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getvalue"><B>getvalue</B></A></DD>
          151  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#icursor"><B>icursor</B></A>
          152  +<I>index</I>
          153  +</DD>
          154  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#post"><B>post</B></A></DD>
          155  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setvalue"><B>setvalue</B></A>
          156  + <I>index</I>
          157  +</DD>
          158  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#unpost"><B>unpost</B></A></DD>
          159  +</DL>
          160  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
          161  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
          162  +<P>
          163  +
          164  +ComboBox widget enables the user to select a value among a list given by
          165  +the <B>values</B> option.  The list of possible values can be popped by
          166  +pressing the ArrowButton or by clicking in the entry when <B>editable</B>
          167  +value of the ComboBox is <B>false</B>.<BR> If <B>editable</B> value of the
          168  +ComboBox is <B>true</B> and the entry has the focus, the user can press the
          169  +top and bottom arrow keys to modify its value. If the current value exactly
          170  +match a value in the list, then the previous (for top arrow key) or then
          171  +next (for bottom arrow key) value in the list is displayed.  If the current
          172  +value match the beginning of a value in the list, then this value is
          173  +displayed.  If the current value doesnt match anything, then the first
          174  +value is displayed.
          175  +
          176  +</P>
          177  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          178  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
          179  +<DL>
          180  +    <DT><A NAME="-autocomplete"><B>-autocomplete</B></A></DT>
          181  +    <DD>
          182  +    Specifies whether or not the combobox should attempt to auto-complete
          183  +    the value in the entry field as the user types.  If true, the combobox
          184  +    will fill in a value that it finds in its value list as the user types
          185  +    into the entry.
          186  +    </DD>
          187  +</DL>
          188  +
          189  +<DL>
          190  +    <DT><A NAME="-autopost"><B>-autopost</B></A></DT>
          191  +    <DD>
          192  +    Specifies whether or not the combobox should post the drop down as
          193  +    the user types.  If true, the combobox will post and scroll to the
          194  +    entry that most closely matches the user entry.
          195  +    </DD>
          196  +</DL>
          197  +
          198  +<DL>
          199  +    <DT><A NAME="-bwlistbox"><B>-bwlistbox</B></A></DT>
          200  +    <DD>
          201  +    Specifies that the combobox should use a BWidget listbox in its drop
          202  +    down instead of the standard Tk option.  This option is enabled by
          203  +    default if the <b>-images</b> option is not empty.
          204  +    </DD>
          205  +</DL>
          206  +
          207  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-expand"><B>-expand</B></A></DT>
          208  +<DD>
          209  +
          210  +Specifies the value expansion behavior for the window. It must be
          211  +<B>none</B> (default) or <B>tab</B>. If <B>tab</B> is specified, then
          212  +a Tab binding is added to attempt to expand the current value based on
          213  +the other values in <B>-values</B>.
          214  +</DD>
          215  +</DL>
          216  +
          217  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
          218  +<DD>
          219  +
          220  +Specifies the desired height for the window, in lines. If zero or less,
          221  +then the desired height for the window is made just large enough to hold
          222  +all the elements in the listbox.
          223  +</DD>
          224  +
          225  +<DL>
          226  +    <DT><A NAME="-hottrack"><B>-hottrack</B></A></DT>
          227  +    <DD>
          228  +    The selection in the drop down listbox will follow the mouse cursor
          229  +    as it moves.
          230  +    </DD>
          231  +</DL>
          232  +
          233  +<DL>
          234  +    <DT><A NAME="-images"><B>-images</B></A></DT>
          235  +    <DD>
          236  +    A list of images that correspond to the <b>-values</b> option.  Each
          237  +    image will be drawn next to its value in the drop down.  This option
          238  +    enables the <b>-bwlistbox</b> by default as it is needed to display
          239  +    images.
          240  +    </DD>
          241  +</DL>
          242  +
          243  +<DL>
          244  +    <DT><A NAME="-listboxwidth"><B>-listboxwidth</B></A></DT>
          245  +    <DD>
          246  +    Specifies the width of the listbox in the drop down.  Defaults to the
          247  +    same size as the combobox.
          248  +    </DD>
          249  +</DL>
          250  +
          251  +</DL>
          252  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-modifycmd"><B>-modifycmd</B></A></DT>
          253  +<DD>
          254  +
          255  +Specifies a Tcl command called when the user modify the value of the ComboBox by selecting it in the listbox or pressing arrow key.
          256  +</DD>
          257  +</DL>
          258  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-postcommand"><B>-postcommand</B></A></DT>
          259  +<DD>
          260  +
          261  +Specifies a Tcl command called before the listbox of the ComboBox is mapped.
          262  +</DD>
          263  +</DL>
          264  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-values"><B>-values</B></A></DT>
          265  +<DD>
          266  +
          267  +Specifies the values to display in the listbox of the ComboBox.
          268  +</DD>
          269  +</DL>
          270  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          271  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          272  +<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A>
          273  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          274  +</DT><DD>
          275  +
          276  +Set bindings on the entry widget.
          277  +
          278  +</DD></DL>
          279  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          280  + <I>option</I>
          281  +</DT><DD>
          282  +
          283  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          284  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          285  +
          286  +</DD></DL>
          287  +
          288  +<DL><DT><A NAME="clearvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>clearvalue</B></A>
          289  +</DT><DD>
          290  +
          291  +Clears the current text of the ComboBox.
          292  +
          293  +</DD></DL>
          294  +
          295  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          296  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          297  +</DT><DD>
          298  +
          299  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no
          300  +<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
          301  +options for <I>pathName</I>.  If <I>option</I> is specified with no
          302  +<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named
          303  +<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of
          304  +the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more
          305  +<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the
          306  +given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command
          307  +returns an empty string.  <I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted
          308  +by the creation command.  Read-only options are not be modified.
          309  +
          310  +</DD></DL>
          311  +
          312  +<DL><DT><A NAME="get"><I>pathName</I> <B>get</B></A>
          313  +</DT><DD>
          314  +
          315  +Returns the current contents of the entry.
          316  +
          317  +</DD></DL>
          318  +
          319  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getentry"><I>pathName</I> <B>getentry</B></A>
          320  +</DT><DD>
          321  +
          322  +Returns the path to the contained entry widget.
          323  +
          324  +</DD></DL>
          325  +
          326  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getlistbox"><I>pathName</I> <B>getlistbox</B></A>
          327  +</DT><DD>
          328  +
          329  +Returns the path to the listbox in the drop down.
          330  +
          331  +</DD></DL>
          332  +
          333  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>getvalue</B></A>
          334  +</DT><DD>
          335  +
          336  +Returns the index of the current text of the ComboBox in the list of values,
          337  +or -1 if it doesn't match any value.
          338  +
          339  +</DD></DL>
          340  +
          341  +<DL><DT><A NAME="icursor"><I>pathName</I> <B>icursor</B></A>
          342  + <I>index</I>
          343  +</DT><DD>
          344  +
          345  +Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the
          346  +character given by <i>index</i>.  Returns an empty string.
          347  +
          348  +</DD></DL>
          349  +
          350  +<DL><DT><A NAME="post"><I>pathName</I> <B>post</B></A>
          351  +</DT><DD>
          352  +
          353  +Post the drop down.
          354  +
          355  +</DD></DL>
          356  +
          357  +<DL><DT><A NAME="setvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>setvalue</B></A>
          358  + <I>index</I>
          359  +</DT><DD>
          360  +
          361  +Set the text of the ComboBox to the value indicated by <I>index</I> in the list of values.
          362  +<I>index</I> may be specified in any of the following forms:
          363  +<P>
          364  +<DL COMPACT>
          365  +<DT>
          366  +<B>last</B>
          367  +<DD>
          368  +Specifies the last element of the list of values.
          369  +<DT><B>first</B>
          370  +<DD>
          371  +Specifies the first element of the list of values.
          372  +<DT>
          373  +<B>next</B>
          374  +<DD>
          375  +Specifies the element following the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
          376  +of values.
          377  +<DT><B>previous</B>
          378  +<DD>
          379  +Specifies the element preceding the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
          380  +of values.
          381  +<DT>
          382  +@<I>number</I>
          383  +<DD>
          384  +Specifies the integer index in the list of values.
          385  +</DL>
          386  +
          387  +</DD></DL>
          388  +
          389  +<DL><DT><A NAME="unpost"><I>pathName</I> <B>unpost</B></A>
          390  +</DT><DD>
          391  +
          392  +Unpost the drop down.
          393  +
          394  +</DD></DL>
          395  +
          396  +<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR>
          397  +
          398  +When Entry of the ComboBox has the input focus, it has the following bindings, in addition
          399  +to the default Entry bindings:
          400  +<UL>
          401  +<LI>Page up set the value of the ComboBox to the first value.
          402  +<LI>Page down set the value of the ComboBox to the last value.
          403  +<LI>Arrow up set the value of the ComboBox to the previous value.
          404  +<LI>Arrow down set the value of the ComboBox to the next value.
          405  +<LI>If <B>-autopost</B> is enabled, Escape unposts the listbox.
          406  +</UL>
          407  +If the listbox is not mapped and ComboBox is not editable or disabled,
          408  +mouse button 1 on the Entry cause the listbox to popup, as if the user press the ArrowButton.
          409  +
          410  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Dialog.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>Dialog</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>Dialog</B>
            6  + - Dialog abstraction with custom buttons
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Dialog</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I><A HREF="ButtonBox.html">OPTIONS from <B>ButtonBox</B></A></I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-homogeneous</TD>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-spacing</TD>
           25  +</TABLE></DD>
           26  +</DL>
           27  +<DL>
           28  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           29  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           30  +<TR>
           31  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-anchor">-anchor</A></TR>
           32  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TR>
           33  +</TR>
           34  +<TR>
           35  +
           36  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-cancel">-cancel</A></TD>
           37  +</TR>
           38  +<TR>
           39  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TR>
           40  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-geometry">-geometry</A></TR>
           41  +</TR>
           42  +<TR>
           43  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-image">-image</A></TR>
           44  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-modal">-modal</A></TR>
           45  +</TR>
           46  +<TR>
           47  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></TR>
           48  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-place">-place</A></TR>
           49  +</TR>
           50  +<TR>
           51  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-separator">-separator</A></TR>
           52  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR>
           53  +</TR>
           54  +<TR>
           55  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TR>
           56  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-transient">-transient</A></TR>
           57  +</TR>
           58  +</TABLE></DD>
           59  +</DL>
           60  +<DL>
           61  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           62  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
           63  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
           64  +</DD>
           65  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           66  + <I>option</I>
           67  +</DD>
           68  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           69  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           70  +</DD>
           71  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#draw"><B>draw</B></A>
           72  + ?<I>focus</I>?
           73  +</DD>
           74  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#enddialog"><B>enddialog</B></A>
           75  + <I>result</I>
           76  +</DD>
           77  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
           78  +</DD>
           79  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
           80  + <I>index</I>
           81  +</DD>
           82  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
           83  + <I>index</I>
           84  + <I>option</I>
           85  +</DD>
           86  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
           87  + <I>index</I>
           88  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           89  +</DD>
           90  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A>
           91  + <I>index</I>
           92  +</DD>
           93  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#withdraw"><B>withdraw</B></A>
           94  +</DD>
           95  +</DL>
           96  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           97  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           98  +<P>
           99  +
          100  +Dialog widget enables the user to create a dialog box.
          101  +Some commands take an <I>index</I> as argument indicating on which
          102  +Button it work. This index is the same specified for equivalent ButtonBox command:
          103  +<P>
          104  +<DL COMPACT>
          105  +<DT>
          106  +<I>number</I>
          107  +<DD>
          108  +Specifies the Button numerically, where 0 corresponds
          109  +to the first added Button, 1 to the next, and so on.
          110  +<DT>
          111  +<B>end</B> or <B>last</B>
          112  +<DD>
          113  +Indicates the last item added.
          114  +<DT><B>default</B>
          115  +<DD>
          116  +Indicates the default Button.
          117  +</DL>
          118  +
          119  +</P>
          120  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          121  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
          122  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-anchor"><B>-anchor (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          123  +<DD>
          124  +
          125  +Specifies the anchor point of the ButtonBox.
          126  +Must be one of <B>w</B>, <B>e</B>, <B>n</B>, <B>s</B> or <B>c</B>.
          127  +If <B>side</B> option is set to <I>top</I> or <I>bottom</I>,
          128  +<B>anchor</B> values <I>n</I>, <I>s</I> and <I>c</I> have the same effect.
          129  +If <B>side</B> option is set to <I>left</I> or <I>right</I>,
          130  +<B>anchor</B> values <I>w</I>, <I>e</I> and <I>c</I> have the same effect.
          131  +
          132  +</DD>
          133  +</DL>
          134  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-bitmap"><B>-bitmap (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          135  +<DD>
          136  +
          137  +Specifies a bitmap to display at the left of the user frame.
          138  +<B>image</B> option override <B>bitmap</B>.
          139  +</DD>
          140  +</DL>
          141  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-cancel"><B>-cancel</B></A></DT>
          142  +<DD>
          143  +
          144  +Specifies the number of the cancel button of the Dialog. When user presses Esc or the windows close button,
          145  +this button is invoked.<BR>
          146  +If set to <B>-1</B>, Esc does not invoke anything.
          147  +The window close button <I>destroys</I> the dialog in this case and returns <B>-1</B>.
          148  +</DD>
          149  +</DL>
          150  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT>
          151  +<DD>
          152  +
          153  +Specifies the number of the default button of the Dialog.
          154  +When user press Return in the Dialog, this button is invoked.
          155  +</DD>
          156  +</DL>
          157  +</DL>
          158  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-geometry"><B>-geometry</B></A></DT>
          159  +<DD>
          160  +
          161  +Set the <B>geometry</B> used when method <B>draw</B> is called.
          162  +See <B>wm geometry</B> for a parameter description.
          163  +</DD>
          164  +</DL>
          165  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-image"><B>-image (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          166  +<DD>
          167  +
          168  +Specifies an image to display at the left of the user frame.
          169  +<B>image</B> option override <B>bitmap</B>.
          170  +</DD>
          171  +</DL>
          172  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-modal"><B>-modal</B></A></DT>
          173  +<DD>
          174  +
          175  +This option must be <B>none</B>, <B>local</B> or <B>global</B>. The value of this option
          176  +specifies the grab mode of the dialog and how works Dialog::<B>draw</B>.
          177  +
          178  +</DD>
          179  +</DL>
          180  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT>
          181  +<DD>
          182  +
          183  +Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is placed relative to its parent. If empty, it is
          184  +placed relative to the root window. Also see <B>place</B> option.
          185  +
          186  +</DD>
          187  +</DL>
          188  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-place"><B>-place</B></A></DT>
          189  +<DD>
          190  +Specifies where to draw the Dialog toplevel relative to the dialog's
          191  +parent. Must be one of <B>none</B>, <B>center</B>, <B>left</B>, <B>right</B>,
          192  +<B>above</B>, <B>below</B>. Default value of <B>place</B> is <I>center</I>.
          193  +
          194  +</DD>
          195  +</DL>
          196  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-separator"><B>-separator (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          197  +<DD>
          198  +
          199  +Specifies wether or not to draw a separator between the user frame and the ButtonBox.
          200  +
          201  +</DD>
          202  +</DL>
          203  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          204  +<DD>
          205  +
          206  +Specifies where to draw the ButtonBox relative to the user frame. Must be one of
          207  +<B>top</B>, <B>left</B>, <B>bottom</B> or <B>right</B>.
          208  +</DD>
          209  +</DL>
          210  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
          211  +<DD>
          212  +
          213  +Title of the Dialog toplevel.
          214  +
          215  +</DD>
          216  +</DL>
          217  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-transient"><B>-transient (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          218  +<DD>
          219  +
          220  +Specifies if the Dialog Toplevel should be a transient window or not. Default
          221  +value of <B>transient</B> is <I>true</I>.
          222  +
          223  +</DD>
          224  +</DL>
          225  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          226  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          227  +<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
          228  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          229  +</DT><DD>
          230  +
          231  +Add a button to the button box of the dialog box. Default -command option is
          232  +<I>Dialog::enddialog $path index</I> where <I>index</I> is number of button added.
          233  +</DD></DL>
          234  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          235  + <I>option</I>
          236  +</DT><DD>
          237  +
          238  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          239  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          240  +</DD></DL>
          241  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          242  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          243  +</DT><DD>
          244  +
          245  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          246  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          247  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          248  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          249  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          250  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          251  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          252  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          253  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          254  +
          255  +</DD></DL>
          256  +<DL><DT><A NAME="draw"><I>pathName</I> <B>draw</B></A>
          257  + ?<I>focus</I>?
          258  +</DT><DD>
          259  +
          260  +This command draw the Dialog, and set grab to it following <B>modal</B> option.
          261  +If <B>modal</B> option is set to <I>none</I>, the command returns immediatly
          262  +an empty string. In all other case, the command returns when Dialog::<B>enddialog</B>
          263  +is called or when Dialog is destroyed.
          264  +The return value is the result argument of Dialog::<B>enddialog</B> or -1 if it is destroyed.
          265  +<P>
          266  +By default, the focus is set to the default button referenced by <B>default</B> option,
          267  +or to the toplevel of Dialog if no default button has been set.
          268  +If <I>focus</I> is present, it must be a pathname, or an index to a button.
          269  +Initial focus is set on this pathname or corresponding button.
          270  +
          271  +</DD></DL>
          272  +<DL><DT><A NAME="enddialog"><I>pathName</I> <B>enddialog</B></A>
          273  + <I>result</I>
          274  +</DT><DD>
          275  +
          276  +This command is typically called within a command of a button to make Dialog::<B>draw</B>
          277  +return.
          278  +
          279  +</DD></DL>
          280  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
          281  +</DT><DD>
          282  +
          283  +Returns the pathname of the user window.
          284  +</DD></DL>
          285  +<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
          286  + <I>index</I>
          287  +</DT><DD>
          288  +
          289  +Invoke the Button given by <I>index</I>.
          290  +
          291  +</DD></DL>
          292  +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
          293  + <I>index</I>
          294  + <I>option</I>
          295  +</DT><DD>
          296  +
          297  +Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
          298  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
          299  +
          300  +</DD></DL>
          301  +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
          302  + <I>index</I>
          303  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          304  +</DT><DD>
          305  +
          306  +This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
          307  +options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
          308  +the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
          309  +item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
          310  +in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
          311  +returns a list describing the current options for the item.
          312  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          313  +
          314  +</DD></DL>
          315  +<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A>
          316  + <I>index</I>
          317  +</DT><DD>
          318  +
          319  +Set the focus to the Button given by <I>index</I>.
          320  +
          321  +</DD></DL>
          322  +<DL><DT><A NAME="withdraw"><I>pathName</I> <B>withdraw</B></A>
          323  +</DT><DD>
          324  +
          325  +Call this command to hide the dialog box.
          326  +
          327  +</DD></DL>
          328  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/DragSite.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>DragSite</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>DragSite</B>
            6  + - Commands set for Drag facilities
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           10  +<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A>
           11  + <I>class</I>
           12  + <I>type</I>
           13  + <I>event</I>
           14  +</DD>
           15  +<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A>
           16  + <I>path</I>
           17  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
           18  +</DD>
           19  +<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#setdrag"><B>setdrag</B></A>
           20  + <I>path</I>
           21  + <I>subpath</I>
           22  + <I>initcmd</I>
           23  + <I>endcmd</I>
           24  + ?<I>force</I>?
           25  +</DD>
           26  +</DL>
           27  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           28  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           29  +<P>
           30  +
           31  +Commands of this namespace enable user to define a BWidget or a Tk widget as a drag site.
           32  +
           33  +
           34  +
           35  +</P>
           36  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           37  +<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
           38  +<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DragSite::<B>include</B></A>
           39  + <I>class</I>
           40  + <I>type</I>
           41  + <I>event</I>
           42  +</DT><DD>
           43  +
           44  +This command provides a simple way to include options relatives to a drag site into
           45  +BWidget resources definition.
           46  +It includes the options needed for <B>register</B>: <I>-dragevent</I>, initialized to
           47  +<I>event</I>, <I>-draginitcmd</I> and <I>-dragendcmd</I>, initialized to empty string,
           48  +and two new options:
           49  +<TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
           50  +<TR><TD><I>-dragenabled</I><TD>Specifies wether or not drag is active (initialized to 0)
           51  +<TR><TD><I>-dragtype</I><TD>Default or alternate dragged data type (initialized to <I>type</I>)
           52  +</TABLE>
           53  +
           54  +</DD></DL>
           55  +<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DragSite::<B>register</B></A>
           56  + <I>path</I>
           57  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
           58  +</DT><DD>
           59  +
           60  +This command is used to declare <I>path</I> as a drag site. Options are:
           61  +
           62  +<P>
           63  +<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
           64  +<DD>
           65  +
           66  +Command called when drag terminates (ie when user release drag icon).
           67  +This command is called with the following arguments:
           68  +<UL>
           69  +<LI>the pathname of the drag source (the widget itself),
           70  +<LI>the pathname of the drop target,
           71  +<LI>the operation,
           72  +<LI>the type of the dragged data,
           73  +<LI>the dragged data,
           74  +<LI>result of the drop (result of the call to <B>-dropcmd</B> of the target),
           75  +</UL>
           76  +If the drop does not occurs, the target and the operation are empty string and the result
           77  +is 0.
           78  +
           79  +</DD>
           80  +</DL>
           81  +<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
           82  +<DD>
           83  +
           84  +Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
           85  +Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
           86  +
           87  +</DD>
           88  +</DL>
           89  +<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
           90  +<DD>
           91  +
           92  +Command called when drag initiates. When the event of option <B>dragevent</B> occurs on
           93  +<I>path</I>, this command is called with the following arguments:
           94  +<UL>
           95  +<LI>pathname of the drag source (<I>path</I>),
           96  +<LI>root x-coordinate of pointer,
           97  +<LI>root y-coordinate of pointer,
           98  +<LI>a toplevel created to represent dragged data. When returning, if it
           99  +has no children, a bitmap is automatically displayed.
          100  +</UL>
          101  +If the command returns an empty string, then the drag will be
          102  +suppressed.  Otherwise the command must return a list containing three
          103  +elements:
          104  +<UL>
          105  +<LI>the type of the data,
          106  +<LI>the list of acceptable basic operations (<B>copy</B>, <B>move</B> and <B>link</B>)
          107  +<LI>and the data.
          108  +</UL>
          109  +Note that even if <B>copy</B> does not appear in the list of basic
          110  +operation, it is considered as an acceptable operation, since
          111  +<B>copy</B> semantic does not modify the drag source.
          112  +
          113  +</DD>
          114  +</DL>
          115  +</DD></DL>
          116  +<DL><DT><A NAME="setdrag">DragSite::<B>setdrag</B></A>
          117  + <I>path</I>
          118  + <I>subpath</I>
          119  + <I>initcmd</I>
          120  + <I>endcmd</I>
          121  + ?<I>force</I>?
          122  +</DT><DD>
          123  +
          124  +This command provides a simple way to call <B>register</B> during a BWidget creation or
          125  +configuration.
          126  +<UL>
          127  +<LI><I>path</I> is the pathname of the BWidget,
          128  +<LI><I>subpath</I> is the pathname of the tk widget where drag event occurs,
          129  +<LI><I>initcmd</I> BWidget command for <I>drag-init</I> event,
          130  +<LI><I>endcmd</I> BWidget command for <I>drag-end</I> event,
          131  +<LI><I>force</I> specifies wether or not to call <B>register</B> whenever no option value has
          132  +changed (0 by default - for BWidget configuration, use 1 for BWidget creation).
          133  +</UL>
          134  +<B>setdrag</B> verifies the modification flag of options <B>dragenabled</B> and
          135  +<B>dragevent</B> and calls <B>register</B> if needed according to the options values and
          136  +<I>initcmd</I> and <I>endcmd</I> arguments. <B>draginitcmd</B> and <B>dragendcmd</B> are not
          137  +taken from options of widget  because they are considered as user command, called by
          138  +BWidget implementation of <I>drag-init</I> and <I>drag-end</I> events.
          139  +
          140  +</DD></DL>
          141  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/DropSite.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>DropSite</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>DropSite</B>
            6  + - Commands set for Drop facilities
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           10  +<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A>
           11  + <I>class</I>
           12  + <I>types</I>
           13  +</DD>
           14  +<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A>
           15  + <I>path</I>
           16  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
           17  +</DD>
           18  +<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setcursor"><B>setcursor</B></A>
           19  + <I>cursor</I>
           20  +</DD>
           21  +<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setdrop"><B>setdrop</B></A>
           22  + <I>path</I>
           23  + <I>subpath</I>
           24  + <I>dropover</I>
           25  + <I>drop</I>
           26  + ?<I>force</I>?
           27  +</DD>
           28  +<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setoperation"><B>setoperation</B></A>
           29  + <I>op</I>
           30  +</DD>
           31  +</DL>
           32  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           33  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           34  +<P>
           35  +
           36  +Commands of this namespace enable user to define a BWidget or a Tk widget as a drop site.
           37  +A drop site is composed of the type of object that can be dropped and associated operation,
           38  +a command called when drop occurs, and a command when an object is dragged over the widget.
           39  +A drop site must have at least one type of acceptable object and a drop command.
           40  +
           41  +</P>
           42  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           43  +<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
           44  +<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DropSite::<B>include</B></A>
           45  + <I>class</I>
           46  + <I>types</I>
           47  +</DT><DD>
           48  +
           49  +This command provides a simple way to include options relatives to a drop site into
           50  +BWidget resources definition.
           51  +It includes the options needed for <B>register</B>, <I>-dropovercmd</I> and <I>-dropcmd</I>,
           52  +initialized to empty string, and <I>-droptypes</I>, initialized to <I>types</I>,
           53  +and one new option:
           54  +<TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
           55  +<TR><TD><I>-dropenabled</I><TD>Specifies wether or not drop is active (initialized to 0)
           56  +</TABLE>
           57  +
           58  +</DD></DL>
           59  +<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DropSite::<B>register</B></A>
           60  + <I>path</I>
           61  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
           62  +</DT><DD>
           63  +
           64  +This command is used to declare <I>path</I> as a drop site. Options are:
           65  +
           66  +<P>
           67  +<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
           68  +<DD>
           69  +
           70  +This command is called when user release the drag icon over a valid
           71  +drop target widget.  Arguments passed to the command are:
           72  +
           73  +<UL>
           74  +<LI>pathname of the drop target (the widget itself),
           75  +<LI>pathname of the drag source,
           76  +<LI>root x-coordinate of the pointer,
           77  +<LI>root y-coordinate of the pointer,
           78  +<LI>operation,
           79  +<LI>type of the dragged data,
           80  +<LI>dragged data.
           81  +</UL>
           82  +
           83  +Its return values is passed as a result to the <B>-dragendcmd</B>
           84  +command of the drag source widget.
           85  +
           86  +</DD>
           87  +</DL>
           88  +<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
           89  +<DD>
           90  +
           91  +This command can be used to provide a dynamic drag while <I>drag-over</I> events.
           92  +While a drag occurs, events &lt;Enter&gt;, &lt;Motion&gt; and &lt;Leave&gt; are catched.
           93  +Arguments passed to the command are:
           94  +<UL>
           95  +<LI>pathname of the drop target (the widget itself),
           96  +<LI>pathname of the drag source,
           97  +<LI>event over the drop target: <I>enter</I>, <I>motion</I> or <I>leave</I>,
           98  +<LI>root x-coordinate of the pointer,
           99  +<LI>root y-coordinate of the pointer,
          100  +<LI>operation,
          101  +<LI>type of the dragged data,
          102  +<LI>dragged data.
          103  +</UL>
          104  +Command must the new status of the drag:
          105  +<UL>
          106  +<LI>0  if widget refuse this drag. Command will not be recalled on motion/leave event.
          107  +<LI>1  if widget accept this drag. Command will not be recalled on motion/leave event.
          108  +<LI>2  if widget refuse this drag. Command will be recalled on each motion event to reevaluate.
          109  +<LI>3  if widget accept this drag. Command will be recalled on each motion event to reevaluate.
          110  +
          111  +</UL>
          112  +Here is a list of events and associated actions on a DropSite widget. This example
          113  +assumes that dragged data type is valid for the drop target.
          114  +<B>status</B> is the status of the drag on a DropSite. Its value is:
          115  +<BR><BR>
          116  +
          117  +<TABLE BORDER CELLSPACING=1 CELLPADDING=4>
          118  +<TR>
          119  +<TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Event</TD>
          120  +<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Old status</TD>
          121  +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Action</TD>
          122  +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">New status</TD>
          123  +</TR>
          124  +<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
          125  +<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Enter&gt;</FONT></TD>
          126  +<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
          127  +<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
          128  +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
          129  +<FONT SIZE=2>if DropSite has <B>dropovercmd</B>, call it with <I>enter</I></FONT></TD>
          130  +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
          131  +<FONT SIZE=2>result of <B>dropovercmd</B></FONT></TD>
          132  +</TR>
          133  +<TR><TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
          134  +<FONT SIZE=2>else</FONT></TD>
          135  +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
          136  +<FONT SIZE=2>1</FONT></TD>
          137  +</TR>
          138  +<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
          139  +<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Motion&gt;</FONT></TD>
          140  +<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
          141  +<FONT SIZE=2>0 or 1</FONT></TD>
          142  +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">&nbsp;</TD>
          143  +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
          144  +<FONT SIZE=2>unchanged</FONT></TD>
          145  +</TR>
          146  +<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
          147  +<FONT SIZE=2>2 or 3</FONT></TD>
          148  +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
          149  +<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>motion</I></FONT></TD>
          150  +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
          151  +<FONT SIZE=2>result of <B>dropovercmd</B></FONT></TD>
          152  +</TR>
          153  +<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
          154  +<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Leave&gt;</FONT>&nbsp;</TD>
          155  +<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
          156  +<FONT SIZE=2>0 or 1</FONT></TD>
          157  +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">&nbsp;</TD>
          158  +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
          159  +<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
          160  +</TR>
          161  +<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
          162  +<FONT SIZE=2>2 or 3</FONT></TD>
          163  +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
          164  +<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>leave</I></FONT></TD>
          165  +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
          166  +<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
          167  +</TR>
          168  +<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=4>
          169  +<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Drop&gt;</FONT></TD>
          170  +<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
          171  +<FONT SIZE=2>0</FONT></TD>
          172  +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
          173  +<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
          174  +<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=4>
          175  +<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
          176  +</TR>
          177  +<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
          178  +<FONT SIZE=2>1</FONT></TD>
          179  +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
          180  +<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropcmd</B> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
          181  +</TR>
          182  +<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
          183  +<FONT SIZE=2>2</FONT></TD>
          184  +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
          185  +<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>leave</I> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
          186  +</TR>
          187  +<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
          188  +<FONT SIZE=2>3</FONT></TD>
          189  +<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
          190  +<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropcmd</B> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
          191  +</TR>
          192  +</TABLE>
          193  +<BR>
          194  +
          195  +</DD>
          196  +</DL>
          197  +<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
          198  +<DD>
          199  +
          200  +Specifies a list {<I>type</I> <I>oplist</I> ?<I>type</I> <I>oplist</I>? ...} of acceptable
          201  +types and associated operations for the drop target.
          202  +For each type, <I>oplist</I> is a list
          203  +{<I>descops</I> <I>mod</I> ?<I>descops</I> <I>mod</I>? ...} describing operations and
          204  +modifier keys for these operations.
          205  +<I>descops</I> describe an operation. It can be a predefined operations (<B>copy</B>,
          206  +<B>move</B> or <B>link</B>) or a new user defined operation, of the form {<I>subop</I>
          207  +<B>baseop</B> ?<I>bitmap</I>?}.
          208  +<I>subop</I> is the name given to the sub operation, <I>baseop</I> is the name of the
          209  +base operation (<B>copy</B>, <B>move</B> or <B>link</B>) and <I>bitmap</I> is a bitmap
          210  +to display for the operation.
          211  +<BR>If <I>bitmap</I> is empty, the default bitmap of the base operation is used for the
          212  +sub operation.
          213  +<BR><I>subop</I> can be a base operation, in order to change the bitmap of a base operation.
          214  +In this case, <I>baseop</I> must be empty or equal to <I>subop</I>.
          215  +<BR><I>mod</I> is the modifer key for the operation. It can be:
          216  +<UL>
          217  +<LI><B>none</B> to specify that no modifier key is pressed. This modifier can only be used
          218  +with a sub operation named <B>default</B> (and vice versa), which has the behaviour of not
          219  +display any bitmap operation. For all type, if the modifier <B>none</B> is not given, it is
          220  +automatically associated to the <B>default</B> sub operation of a <B>copy</B> base operation.
          221  +<LI><B>program</B> to specifies a sub operation accessible only by <B>DropSite::setoperation</B>.
          222  +<LI>A list combining <B>shift</B>, <B>control</B> and <B>alt</B>, which means their 
          223  +corresponding key.
          224  +</UL>
          225  +
          226  +</DD>
          227  +</DL>
          228  +</DD></DL>
          229  +<DL><DT><A NAME="setcursor">DropSite::<B>setcursor</B></A>
          230  + <I>cursor</I>
          231  +</DT><DD>
          232  +
          233  +This command can be used within the script <B>dragovercmd</B>. It is usefull to provide
          234  +visual effect about the state of the drag.
          235  +</DD></DL>
          236  +<DL><DT><A NAME="setdrop">DropSite::<B>setdrop</B></A>
          237  + <I>path</I>
          238  + <I>subpath</I>
          239  + <I>dropover</I>
          240  + <I>drop</I>
          241  + ?<I>force</I>?
          242  +</DT><DD>
          243  +
          244  +This command provides a simple way to call <B>register</B> during a BWidget creation or
          245  +configuration.
          246  +<UL>
          247  +<LI><I>path</I> is the pathname of the BWidget,
          248  +<LI><I>subpath</I> is the pathname of the tk widget where drag event occurs,
          249  +<LI><I>dropover</I> is a command for <I>drag-over</I> event,
          250  +<LI><I>drop</I> is a command for <I>drop</I> event,
          251  +<LI><I>force</I> specifies wether or not to call <B>register</B> whenever no option value
          252  +has changed (0 by default - for BWidget configuration, use 1 for BWidget creation).
          253  +</UL>
          254  +<B>setdrop</B> verifies the modification flag of options <B>dropenabled</B> and
          255  +<B>droptypes</B> and calls <B>register</B> if needed according to the options values and
          256  +<I>dropover</I> and <I>drop</I> arguments. <B>dropovercmd</B> and <B>dropcmd</B> are not
          257  +taken from options of widget because they are considered as user command, called by
          258  +BWidget implementation of <I>drag-over</I> and <I>drop</I> events.
          259  +
          260  +</DD></DL>
          261  +<DL><DT><A NAME="setoperation">DropSite::<B>setoperation</B></A>
          262  + <I>op</I>
          263  +</DT><DD>
          264  +Description text
          265  +</DD></DL>
          266  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/DynamicHelp.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>DynamicHelp</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>DynamicHelp</B>
            6  + - Provide help to Tk widget or BWidget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           10  +<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
           11  +<i>widget</i> ?<I>option value ...</I>?
           12  +</DD>
           13  +<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           14  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           15  +</DD>
           16  +<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
           17  +<i>widget</i>
           18  +</DD>
           19  +<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A>
           20  + <I>class</I>
           21  + <I>type</I>
           22  +</DD>
           23  +<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A>
           24  + <I>path</I>
           25  + <I>type</I>
           26  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
           27  +</DD>
           28  +<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#sethelp"><B>sethelp</B></A>
           29  + <I>path</I>
           30  + <I>subpath</I>
           31  + ?<I>force</I>?
           32  +</DD>
           33  +</DL>
           34  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           35  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           36  +<P>
           37  +Description text
           38  +</P>
           39  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           40  +<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
           41  +
           42  +<DL><DT><A NAME="add">DynamicHelp::<B>add</B></A>
           43  + ?<I>option value ...</I>?
           44  +</DT><DD>
           45  +<p>
           46  +This command adds dynamic help to the given <i>widget</i>.
           47  +</p>
           48  +    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
           49  +    <DD>
           50  +    	If specified, refers to a command to execute to get the help
           51  +	text to display.  The command must return a string to display.
           52  +	If the command returns an empty string, no help is displayed.
           53  +    </DD>
           54  +    </DL>
           55  +
           56  +    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-index"><B>-index</B></A></DT>
           57  +    <DD>
           58  +	If specified, refers to a menu index to bind the help to instead of
           59  +	a widget.  If <b>-type</b> is not menu, this option is ignored.
           60  +    </DD>
           61  +    </DL>
           62  +
           63  +    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-item"><B>-item</B></A></DT>
           64  +    <DD>
           65  +    	If specified, refers to an item or tag on a canvas widget or to a tag
           66  +        in a text widget to bind the help to instead of to a widget.
           67  +    </DD>
           68  +    </DL>
           69  +
           70  +    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
           71  +    <DD>
           72  +	Specifies the type of help.  Can be:
           73  +	<b>balloon</b>, <b>variable</b> or <b>menu</b>.
           74  +	Default is <b>balloon</b>.
           75  +    </DD>
           76  +    </DL>
           77  +
           78  +    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
           79  +    <DD>
           80  +    	The text to be displayed as help.
           81  +    </DD>
           82  +    </DL>
           83  +
           84  +    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-variable"><B>-variable</B></A></DT>
           85  +    <DD>
           86  +    	Specifies a variable name to which the help string will be
           87  +        written.  Some other widget (e.g., a status bar) is
           88  +        responsible for displaying this variable.
           89  +    </DD>
           90  +    </DL>
           91  +
           92  +    <p>
           93  +    Creating dynamic help for a menu is a two-step process.  The menu
           94  +    itself must first be added and then each menu entry must be added
           95  +    separately.  Here is a brief example.
           96  +    </p>
           97  +
           98  +    <TABLE BORDER=2 CELLSPACING=2 WIDTH="80%">
           99  +    <TR><TD><PRE>
          100  +    <FONT COLOR=red><I># create menu</I></FONT>
          101  +    menu .m -type menubar
          102  +    <FONT COLOR=red><I># associate menubar to toplevel BEFORE DynamicHelp::register</I></FONT>
          103  +    <FONT COLOR=red><I># to make it works with menu clone name</I></FONT>
          104  +    . configure -menu .m
          105  +    .m add cascade -label "File" -menu .m.file
          106  +    menu .m.file
          107  +    .m.file add command -label "Open..."
          108  +    .m.file add command -label "Quit"
          109  +    <FONT COLOR=red><I># create label for help, using variable varinfo</I></FONT>
          110  +    label .l -textvariable varinfo
          111  +    <FONT COLOR=red><I># associate all entries of menu .m.file to variable varinfo</I></FONT>
          112  +    DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -variable varinfo
          113  +    <FONT COLOR=red><I># then declare entries of .m.file</I></FONT>
          114  +    DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 0 -text "Detach menu"
          115  +    DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 1 -text "Open a file"
          116  +    DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 2 -text "Exit demo"
          117  +    </PRE></TD></TR></TABLE></CENTER>
          118  +
          119  +</DL>
          120  +
          121  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure">DynamicHelp::<B>configure</B></A>
          122  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          123  +</DT><DD>
          124  +This command configure the ballon help.
          125  +<P>
          126  +<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-borderwidth"><B>-borderwidth</B></A></DT>
          127  +<DD>
          128  +Width of the black border around the balloon.
          129  +</DD>
          130  +</DL>
          131  +<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-delay"><B>-delay</B></A></DT>
          132  +<DD>
          133  +Define the delay in millisecond of mouse inactivity before displaying
          134  +the balloon.
          135  +</DD>
          136  +</DL>
          137  +<dl>
          138  +    <dt><a name="DynamicHelp-state"><b>-state</b></a></dt>
          139  +    <dd>
          140  +    Specifies one of two states for help balloons: <b>normal</b> and
          141  +    <b>disabled</b>.
          142  +    </dd>
          143  +    <dd>
          144  +    If <b>state</b> is <b>disabled</b>, help balloons will not be displayed
          145  +    for any registered widget.
          146  +    </dd>
          147  +</dl>
          148  +<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-topbackground"><B>-topbackground</B></A></DT>
          149  +<DD>
          150  +The background color of the toplevel window created for a balloon.
          151  +</DD>
          152  +</DL>
          153  +<BR>Other standard options are:
          154  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
          155  +<TR>
          156  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
          157  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
          158  +</TR>
          159  +<TR>
          160  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
          161  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TR>
          162  +</TR>
          163  +<TR>
          164  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD>
          165  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TR>
          166  +</TR>
          167  +</TABLE></DD>
          168  +</DD></DL>
          169  +
          170  +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete">DynamicHelp::<B>delete</B></A>
          171  + <I>widget</I>
          172  +</DT><DD>
          173  +    Delete all dynamic help for the given <i>widget</i>.
          174  +</DD></DL>
          175  +
          176  +<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DynamicHelp::<B>include</B></A>
          177  + <I>class</I>
          178  + <I>type</I>
          179  +</DT><DD>
          180  +Description text
          181  +</DD></DL>
          182  +<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DynamicHelp::<B>register</B></A>
          183  + <I>path</I>
          184  + <I>type</I>
          185  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          186  +</DT><DD>
          187  +<p>
          188  +<b>Its use is deprecated.  Use <i>DynamicHelp::add</i> instead.</b>
          189  +</p>
          190  +
          191  +Register a help text to the widget <I>path</I>.
          192  +<I>type</I> determines the type of the help or the type of the widget.
          193  +Depending on <I>type</I>, other options must be provided.
          194  +<BR>
          195  +<TABLE CELLSPACING=5 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
          196  +<TR><TD><B>    type      </B></TD><TD><B>     options      </B></TD></TR>
          197  +<TR><TD><B><I> balloon   </I></B></TD><TD><I> ?tagOrItem? text </I></TD></TR>
          198  +<TR><TD><B><I> variable  </I></B></TD><TD><I> ?tagOrItem? varName text </I></TD></TR>
          199  +<TR><TD><B><I> menu      </I></B></TD><TD><I> varName      </I></TD></TR>
          200  +<TR><TD><B><I> menuentry </I></B></TD><TD><I> index text   </I></TD></TR>
          201  +</TABLE>
          202  +<BR>If one of the option is missing or is empty, help is removed for this widget.
          203  +<p>
          204  +
          205  +If <i>tagOrItem</i> is specified, then <i>path</i> is a canvas or a text. In
          206  +case of a canvas, <i>tagOrItem</i> is the name of a tag or item on the canvas
          207  +to which the help will be bound. In case of a text, <i>tagOrItem</i> is the
          208  +name of a tag on the text to which the help will be bound.
          209  +
          210  +</p>
          211  +For type other than <I>balloon</I>, <I>varName</I> is typically a variable
          212  +linked to a label.
          213  +<BR>For menu, balloon type help is not available. To declare a help for menu,
          214  +you first declare the menu, and then entries of this menu.
          215  +<BR>For example:
          216  +<BR><BR>
          217  +<CENTER>
          218  +<TABLE BORDER=2 CELLSPACING=2 WIDTH="80%">
          219  +<TR><TD><PRE>
          220  +     <FONT COLOR=red><I># create menu</I></FONT>
          221  +menu .m -type menubar
          222  +<FONT COLOR=red><I># associate menubar to toplevel BEFORE DynamicHelp::register</I></FONT>
          223  +<FONT COLOR=red><I># to make it works with menu clone name</I></FONT>
          224  +. configure -menu .m
          225  +.m add cascade -label "File" -menu .m.file
          226  +menu .m.file
          227  +.m.file add command -label "Open..."
          228  +.m.file add command -label "Quit"
          229  +<FONT COLOR=red><I># create label for help, using variable varinfo</I></FONT>
          230  +label .l -textvariable varinfo
          231  +<FONT COLOR=red><I># associate all entries of menu .m.file to variable varinfo</I></FONT>
          232  +DynamicHelp::register .m.file menu varinfo
          233  +<FONT COLOR=red><I># then declare entries of .m.file</I></FONT>
          234  +DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 0 "Detach menu"
          235  +DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 1 "Open a file"
          236  +DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 2 "Exit demo"
          237  +</PRE></TD></TR></TABLE></CENTER>
          238  +<BR>
          239  +<BR>Notice that if popup menu is owned by a menubar, you must associate first the menubar
          240  +to its toplevel. In this case, when you create a menu popup, its clone window is also
          241  +created, and DynamicHelp::register detects the exitence of the clone window and maps
          242  +events to it.
          243  +</DD></DL>
          244  +<DL><DT><A NAME="sethelp">DynamicHelp::<B>sethelp</B></A>
          245  + <I>path</I>
          246  + <I>subpath</I>
          247  + ?<I>force</I>?
          248  +</DT><DD>
          249  +Description text
          250  +</DD></DL>
          251  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Entry.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>Entry</B>
            6  + - Entry widget with <B>state</B> option, dynamic help and drag and drop facilities
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Entry</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
           15  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           16  +<TR>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           18  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           19  +</TR>
           20  +<TR>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledbackground">-disabledbackground</A></TD>
           22  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TD>
           23  +</TR>
           24  +<TR>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-exportselection">-exportselection</A></TD>
           26  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
           27  +</TR>
           28  +<TR>
           29  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
           30  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
           31  +</TR>
           32  +<TR>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
           35  +</TR>
           36  +<TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertbackground">-insertbackground</A></TD>
           38  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertborderwidth">-insertborderwidth</A></TD>
           39  +</TR>
           40  +<TR>
           41  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertofftime">-insertofftime</A></TD>
           42  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertontime">-insertontime</A></TD>
           43  +</TR>
           44  +<TR>
           45  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertwidth">-insertwidth</A></TD>
           46  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
           47  +</TR>
           48  +<TR>
           49  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
           50  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD>
           51  +</TR>
           52  +<TR>
           53  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectborderwidth">-selectborderwidth</A></TD>
           54  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD>
           55  +</TR>
           56  +<TR>
           57  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
           58  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
           59  +</TR>
           60  +<TR>
           61  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
           62  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
           63  +</TABLE></DD>
           64  +</DL>
           65  +<DL>
           66  +<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
           67  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           68  +<TR>
           69  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-exportselection">-exportselection</A></TD>
           70  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
           71  +</TR>
           72  +<TR>
           73  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertofftime">-insertofftime</A></TD>
           74  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertontime">-insertontime</A></TD>
           75  +</TR>
           76  +<TR>
           77  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertwidth">-insertwidth</A></TD>
           78  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
           79  +</TR>
           80  +<TR>
           81  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
           82  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
           83  +</TR>
           84  +<TR>
           85  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
           86  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
           87  +</TABLE></DD>
           88  +</DL>
           89  +<DL>
           90  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           91  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           92  +<TR>
           93  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TD>
           94  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD>
           95  +</TR>
           96  +<TR>
           97  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD>
           98  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD>
           99  +</TR>
          100  +<TR>
          101  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD>
          102  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD>
          103  +</TR>
          104  +<TR>
          105  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD>
          106  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD>
          107  +</TR>
          108  +<TR>
          109  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD>
          110  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD>
          111  +</TR>
          112  +<TR>
          113  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-editable">-editable</A></TD>
          114  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TD>
          115  +</TR>
          116  +<TR>
          117  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TD>
          118  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TD>
          119  +</TR>
          120  +<TR>
          121  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-show">-show</A></TD>
          122  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TD>
          123  +</TR>
          124  +<TR>
          125  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
          126  +</TABLE></DD>
          127  +</DL>
          128  +<DL>
          129  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
          130  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
          131  + <I>option</I>
          132  +</DD>
          133  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
          134  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          135  +</DD>
          136  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
          137  +</DD>
          138  +</DL>
          139  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
          140  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
          141  +<P>
          142  +
          143  +The <B>Entry</B> widget extends the default Tk entry. Options have been added to provide
          144  +visual effect depending on the state of the Entry,
          145  +<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options,
          146  +and <A HREF="DragSite.html">Drag</A> and
          147  +<A HREF="DropSite.html">Drop</A>.
          148  +Entry behaves much like a Label, with <B>text</B> option to set its contents.
          149  +<BR>Tk entry command can also be used on Entry widget.
          150  +
          151  +</P>
          152  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          153  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
          154  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
          155  +<DD>
          156  +
          157  +Specifies a command when user press &lt;Return&gt; in the Entry.
          158  +</DD>
          159  +</DL>
          160  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
          161  +<DD>
          162  +A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
          163  +</DD>
          164  +</DL>
          165  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
          166  +<DD>
          167  +
          168  +Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
          169  +<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
          170  +option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          171  +
          172  +<BR>If <B>dragendcmd</B> is empty, the internal <I>dragend</I> command updates the entry
          173  +following the operation (<B>move</B> or <B>copy</B>) and the dragged data
          174  +(whole or selected part of the entry).
          175  +
          176  +</DD>
          177  +</DL>
          178  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
          179  +<DD>
          180  +
          181  +Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
          182  +Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
          183  +
          184  +</DD>
          185  +</DL>
          186  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
          187  +<DD>
          188  +
          189  +Specifies a command to be called when <B>dragevent</B> occurs on widget.
          190  +<B>draginitcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
          191  +option <B>draginitcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          192  +
          193  +<BR>if <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, the command refuse the drag if entry is empty or if
          194  +portion of text is selected and event doesn't occur above the selection. In all other cases,
          195  +the command returns:
          196  +<UL>
          197  +<LI>as the data type, the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>TEXT</I> if empty,
          198  +<LI>as the operations, <I>{copy move}</I> if <B>state</B> is normal and <B>editable</B>
          199  +is true, or <I>{copy}</I> only in other cases, 
          200  +<LI>as the data, the whole content or the selected portion of the entry.
          201  +</UL>
          202  +
          203  +</DD>
          204  +</DL>
          205  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
          206  +<DD>
          207  +
          208  +Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.
          209  +
          210  +</DD>
          211  +</DL>
          212  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
          213  +<DD>
          214  +
          215  +Entry has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling
          216  +and extract current position.
          217  +<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
          218  +<UL>
          219  +<LI>the pathname of the Entry,
          220  +<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
          221  +<LI>the numeric index in the entry designated by the cursor,
          222  +<LI>the current operation,
          223  +<LI>the data type,
          224  +<LI>the data.
          225  +</UL>
          226  +and must return a value conforming to <B>dropcmd</B> option described in
          227  +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          228  +If <B>dropcmd</B> is empty, the wrapper updates the entry following the type of data:
          229  +<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
          230  +<TR><TD><I>COLOR</I> or <I>FGCOLOR</I></TD>
          231  +<TD>reconfigure the <B>foreground</B> of the Entry</TD>
          232  +<TR><TD><I>BGCOLOR</I></TD>
          233  +<TD>reconfigure the <B>background</B> of the Entry</TD>
          234  +<TR><TD><I>TEXT</I>,<BR>or any other tag</TD>
          235  +<TD>reconfigure the Entry to display the associated string.</TD>
          236  +</TABLE></DL>
          237  +and returns 1.
          238  +
          239  +</DD>
          240  +</DL>
          241  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
          242  +<DD>
          243  +A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
          244  +</DD>
          245  +</DL>
          246  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
          247  +<DD>
          248  +
          249  +Entry has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling
          250  +and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>.
          251  +<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is empty, the wrapper accepts the drop if <B>editable</b> option is
          252  +true and <B>state</B> option is normal.
          253  +<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
          254  +<UL>
          255  +<LI>the pathname of the Entry,
          256  +<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
          257  +<LI>the event,
          258  +<LI>the numeric index in the entry designated by the cursor,
          259  +<LI>the current operation,
          260  +<LI>the data type,
          261  +<LI>the data.
          262  +</UL>
          263  +and must return a value conforming to <B>dropovercmd</B> option described in
          264  +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          265  +
          266  +</DD>
          267  +</DL>
          268  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
          269  +<DD>
          270  +
          271  +Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
          272  +See option <B>droptypes</B> of
          273  +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          274  +for more infromation.
          275  +
          276  +Default accepts <I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I> and <I>TEXT</I>,
          277  +all with <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B> operations.
          278  +
          279  +</DD>
          280  +</DL>
          281  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-editable"><B>-editable</B></A></DT>
          282  +<DD>
          283  +
          284  +Specifies whether the Entry is editable by the user. Equivalent to the <B>state</B> option
          285  +of the Tk entry widget.
          286  +</DD>
          287  +</DL>
          288  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
          289  +<DD>
          290  +
          291  +Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
          292  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          293  +</DD>
          294  +</DL>
          295  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
          296  +<DD>
          297  +Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
          298  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          299  +</DD>
          300  +</DL>
          301  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
          302  +<DD>
          303  +Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
          304  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          305  +</DD>
          306  +</DL>
          307  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-show"><B>-show</B></A></DT>
          308  +<DD>
          309  +
          310  +If this option is specified, then the true contents of the entry are not displayed in the
          311  +window. Instead, each character in the entry's value will be displayed as the first character
          312  +in the value of this option, such as ``*''. This is useful, for example, if the entry is to
          313  +be used to enter a password. If characters in the entry are selected and copied elsewhere, the
          314  +information copied will be what is displayed, not the true contents of the entry.
          315  +</DD>
          316  +</DL>
          317  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
          318  +<DD>
          319  +
          320  +Specifies one of two states for the Entry:  <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>.
          321  +In normal state the text of the Entry is displayed using the <B>foreground</B> option.
          322  +In disabled state the text of the Entry is displayed using the <B>disabledforeground</B>
          323  +option. If the entry is disabled then the value may not be changed by user input
          324  +and no insertion cursor will be displayed, even if the input focus is in the widget.
          325  +Disabled state is the same as not editable with visual effect.
          326  +</DD>
          327  +</DL>
          328  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
          329  +<DD>
          330  +
          331  +Specifies an integer value indicating the desired width of the entry window, in average-size
          332  +characters of the widget's font. If the value is less than or equal to zero, the widget picks
          333  +a size just large enough to hold its current text.
          334  +</DD>
          335  +</DL>
          336  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          337  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          338  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          339  + <I>option</I>
          340  +</DT><DD>
          341  +
          342  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          343  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          344  +</DD></DL>
          345  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          346  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          347  +</DT><DD>
          348  +
          349  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          350  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          351  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          352  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          353  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          354  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          355  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          356  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          357  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          358  +
          359  +</DD></DL>
          360  +<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
          361  +</DT><DD>
          362  +
          363  +Calls the command specified by the option <B>-command</B>.
          364  +
          365  +</DD></DL>
          366  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Label.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>Label</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>Label</B>
            6  + - Label widget with <B>state</B> option, dynamic help and drag and drop facilities
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Label</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
           15  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           16  +<TR>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TR>
           18  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           19  +</TR>
           20  +<TR>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TR>
           22  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           23  +</TR>
           24  +<TR>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TR>
           26  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TR>
           27  +</TR>
           28  +<TR>
           29  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
           30  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
           31  +</TR>
           32  +<TR>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TR>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TR>
           35  +</TR>
           36  +<TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TR>
           38  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TR>
           39  +</TR>
           40  +<TR>
           41  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TR>
           42  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TR>
           43  +</TR>
           44  +<TR>
           45  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TR>
           46  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
           47  +</TR>
           48  +<TR>
           49  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR>
           50  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
           51  +</TR>
           52  +<TR>
           53  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
           54  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TR>
           55  +</TR>
           56  +</TABLE></DD>
           57  +<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
           58  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           59  +<TR>
           60  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TR>
           61  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           62  +</TR>
           63  +<TR>
           64  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD></TR>
           65  +<TR>
           66  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
           67  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
           68  +</TR>
           69  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TR>
           70  +</TR>
           71  +<TR>
           72  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
           73  +</TR>
           74  +<TR>
           75  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
           76  +</TR>
           77  +<TR>
           78  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR>
           79  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
           80  +</TR>
           81  +<TR>
           82  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
           83  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TR>
           84  +</TR>
           85  +</TABLE></DD>
           86  +</DL>
           87  +<DL>
           88  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           89  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           90  +<TR>
           91  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TR>
           92  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TR>
           93  +</TR>
           94  +<TR>
           95  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TR>
           96  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TR>
           97  +</TR>
           98  +<TR>
           99  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TR>
          100  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TR>
          101  +</TR>
          102  +<TR>
          103  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TR>
          104  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TR>
          105  +</TR>
          106  +<TR>
          107  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TR>
          108  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-focus">-focus</A></TR>
          109  +</TR>
          110  +<TR>
          111  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
          112  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TR>
          113  +</TR>
          114  +<TR>
          115  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TR>
          116  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TR>
          117  +</TR>
          118  +<TR>
          119  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-name">-name</A></TR>
          120  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR>
          121  +</TR>
          122  +<TR>
          123  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-underline">-underline</A></TR>
          124  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
          125  +</TR>
          126  +</TABLE></DD>
          127  +</DL>
          128  +<DL>
          129  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
          130  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
          131  + <I>option</I>
          132  +</DD>
          133  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
          134  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          135  +</DD>
          136  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A>
          137  +</DD>
          138  +</DL>
          139  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
          140  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
          141  +<P>
          142  +
          143  +The <B>Label</B> widget extends the default Tk label. Options have been added to provide
          144  +visual effect depending on the state of the Label, <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options, and <A HREF="DragSite.html">Drag
          145  +</A> and <A HREF="DropSite.html">Drop</A>.
          146  +</P>
          147  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          148  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
          149  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
          150  +<DD>
          151  +A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
          152  +</DD>
          153  +</DL>
          154  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
          155  +<DD>
          156  +
          157  +Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
          158  +<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
          159  +option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          160  +
          161  +</DD>
          162  +</DL>
          163  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
          164  +<DD>
          165  +
          166  +Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
          167  +Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
          168  +
          169  +</DD>
          170  +</DL>
          171  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
          172  +<DD>
          173  +
          174  +Specifies a command to be called when <B>dragevent</B> occurs on widget.
          175  +<B>draginitcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
          176  +option <B>draginitcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          177  +
          178  +<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, the internal <B>draginitcmd</B> command is used instead
          179  +and returns:
          180  +<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
          181  +<TR><TD valign=top><I>IMAGE&nbsp;{copy}&nbsp;&lt;image&nbsp;name&gt;</I>
          182  +<TD>if an image is displayed.
          183  +<TR><TD valign=top><I>BITMAP&nbsp;{copy}&nbsp;&lt;bitmap&nbsp;name&gt;</I>
          184  +<TD>if a bitmap is displayed.
          185  +<TR><TD valign=top><I>TEXT&nbsp;{copy}&nbsp;&lt;text&gt;</I>
          186  +<TD>if a text is displayed.
          187  +</TABLE></DL>
          188  +Note that if <B>dragtype</B> option is not empty, its value is used instead of those above.
          189  +
          190  +</DD>
          191  +</DL>
          192  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
          193  +<DD>
          194  +
          195  +Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.
          196  +
          197  +</DD>
          198  +</DL>
          199  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
          200  +<DD>
          201  +
          202  +Specifies a command to be called when drop occurs on the widget.
          203  +<B>dropcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
          204  +option <B>dropcmd</B> of <B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          205  +
          206  +<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is empty, the command updates the label following the type of the data:
          207  +<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
          208  +<TR><TD><I>COLOR</I> or <I>FGCOLOR</I></TD>
          209  +<TD>reconfigure the <B>foreground</B> of the Label.</TD>
          210  +<TR><TD><I>BGCOLOR</I></TD>
          211  +<TD>reconfigure the <B>background</B> of the Label.</TD>
          212  +<TR><TD><I>IMAGE</I></TD>
          213  +<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated image.</TD>
          214  +<TR><TD><I>BITMAP</I></TD>
          215  +<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated bitmap.
          216  +<B>image</B> option is set to empty.</TD>
          217  +<TR><TD><I>TEXT</I>,<BR>or any other tag</TD>
          218  +<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated string.
          219  +<B>image</B> and <B>bitmap</B> options are set to empty.</TD>
          220  +</TABLE></DL>
          221  +and returns 1.
          222  +
          223  +</DD>
          224  +</DL>
          225  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
          226  +<DD>
          227  +A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
          228  +</DD>
          229  +</DL>
          230  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
          231  +<DD>
          232  +
          233  +Specifies a command to be called when drag icon is over the widget.
          234  +<B>dropovercmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
          235  +option <B>dropovercmd</B> of <B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          236  +
          237  +<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is empty, Label always accepts the drop if data type is
          238  +<I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I>, and accepts all other data type only if
          239  +<B>state</B> is normal.
          240  +
          241  +</DD>
          242  +</DL>
          243  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
          244  +<DD>
          245  +
          246  +Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
          247  +See option <B>droptypes</B> of
          248  +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          249  +for more infromation.
          250  +
          251  +Default accepts <I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I>, <I>TEXT</I>, <I>BITMAP</I>
          252  +and <I>IMAGE</I>, all with <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B> operations.
          253  +
          254  +</DD>
          255  +</DL>
          256  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-focus"><B>-focus</B></A></DT>
          257  +<DD>
          258  +
          259  +Specifies a pathname to set the focus on for Label::<B>setfocus</B> command.
          260  +
          261  +</DD>
          262  +</DL>
          263  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
          264  +<DD>
          265  +
          266  +Specifies a desired height for the label.
          267  +If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in
          268  +screen units, for text it is in lines of text.
          269  +If this option isn't specified, the label's desired height is computed
          270  +from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.<BR>
          271  +Option not available for <I>themed</I> widgets.
          272  +</DD>
          273  +</DL>
          274  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
          275  +<DD>
          276  +
          277  +Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
          278  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          279  +</DD>
          280  +</DL>
          281  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
          282  +<DD>
          283  +Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
          284  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          285  +</DD>
          286  +</DL>
          287  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
          288  +<DD>
          289  +Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
          290  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          291  +</DD>
          292  +</DL>
          293  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-name"><B>-name</B></A></DT>
          294  +<DD>
          295  +
          296  +Specifies a standard name for the label. If the option <B>*<I>name</I>Name</B> is
          297  +found in the resource database, then <B>text</B> and <B>underline</B> options
          298  +are extracted from its value.
          299  +
          300  +</DD>
          301  +</DL>
          302  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
          303  +<DD>
          304  +
          305  +Specifies one of two states for the Label:  <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>.
          306  +In normal state the text of the Label is displayed using the <B>foreground</B> option.
          307  +In disabled state the text of the Label is displayed using the <B>disabledforeground</B> option.
          308  +</DD>
          309  +</DL>
          310  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-underline"><B>-underline</B></A></DT>
          311  +<DD>
          312  +
          313  +Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the label.
          314  +0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed, 1 to the next character,
          315  +and so on.
          316  +<BR>The binding <B>&lt;Alt-<I>char</I>&gt;</B> is automatically set on the toplevel
          317  +of the Label to call Label::<B>setfocus</B>.
          318  +
          319  +</DD>
          320  +</DL>
          321  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
          322  +<DD>
          323  +
          324  +Specifies a desired width for the label.
          325  +If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in
          326  +screen units, for text it is in characters.
          327  +If this option isn't specified, the label's desired width is computed
          328  +from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
          329  +
          330  +</DD>
          331  +</DL>
          332  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          333  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          334  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          335  + <I>option</I>
          336  +</DT><DD>
          337  +
          338  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          339  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          340  +</DD></DL>
          341  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          342  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          343  +</DT><DD>
          344  +
          345  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          346  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          347  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          348  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          349  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          350  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          351  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          352  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          353  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          354  +
          355  +</DD></DL>
          356  +<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A>
          357  +</DT><DD>
          358  +
          359  +Set the focus on the pathname given by <B>-focus</B> option if <B>-state</B> is <I>normal</I>.
          360  +
          361  +</DD></DL>
          362  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/LabelEntry.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>LabelEntry</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>LabelEntry</B>
            6  + - 
            7  +LabelFrame containing an Entry widget.
            8  +
            9  +</DD></DL>
           10  +<DL>
           11  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           12  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>LabelEntry</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           13  +</DL>
           14  +<DL>
           15  +<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT>
           16  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           17  +<TR>
           18  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
           19  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-command</TD>
           20  +</TR>
           21  +<TR>
           22  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
           23  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragenabled</TD>
           24  +</TR>
           25  +<TR>
           26  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragendcmd</TD>
           27  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragevent</TD>
           28  +</TR>
           29  +<TR>
           30  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-draginitcmd</TD>
           31  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragtype</TD>
           32  +</TR>
           33  +<TR>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropcmd</TD>
           35  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropenabled</TD>
           36  +</TR>
           37  +<TR>
           38  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropovercmd</TD>
           39  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-droptypes</TD>
           40  +</TR>
           41  +<TR>
           42  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-editable</TD>
           43  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD>
           44  +</TR>
           45  +<TR>
           46  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
           47  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
           48  +</TR>
           49  +<TR>
           50  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
           51  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
           52  +</TR>
           53  +<TR>
           54  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
           55  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
           56  +</TR>
           57  +<TR>
           58  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
           59  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
           60  +</TR>
           61  +<TR>
           62  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
           63  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
           64  +</TR>
           65  +<TR>
           66  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
           67  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
           68  +</TR>
           69  +<TR>
           70  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
           71  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
           72  +</TR>
           73  +<TR>
           74  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
           75  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-relief</TD>
           76  +</TR>
           77  +<TR>
           78  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
           79  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
           80  +</TR>
           81  +<TR>
           82  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
           83  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-show</TD>
           84  +</TR>
           85  +<TR>
           86  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
           87  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-takefocus</TD>
           88  +</TR>
           89  +<TR>
           90  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
           91  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
           92  +</TR>
           93  +<TR>
           94  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
           95  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-xscrollcommand</TD>
           96  +</TR>
           97  +</TABLE></DD>
           98  +</DL>
           99  +<DL>
          100  +<DT><I><A HREF="LabelFrame.html">OPTIONS from <B>LabelFrame</B></A></I></DT>
          101  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
          102  +<TR>
          103  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
          104  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
          105  +</TR>
          106  +<TR>
          107  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
          108  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
          109  +</TR>
          110  +<TR>
          111  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
          112  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
          113  +</TR>
          114  +<TR>
          115  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-label (see <B>-text</B>)</TD>
          116  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelanchor (see <B>-anchor</B>)</TD>
          117  +</TR>
          118  +<TR>
          119  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelfont (see <B>-font</B>)</TD>
          120  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelheight (see <B>-height</B>)</TD>
          121  +</TR>
          122  +<TR>
          123  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labeljustify (see <B>-justify</B>)</TD>
          124  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelwidth (see <B>-width</B>)</TD>
          125  +</TR>
          126  +<TR>
          127  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-name</TD>
          128  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
          129  +</TR>
          130  +<TR>
          131  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
          132  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-side</TD>
          133  +</TR>
          134  +<TR>
          135  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
          136  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-underline</TD>
          137  +</TR>
          138  +<TR>
          139  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-wraplength</TD>
          140  +</TABLE></DD>
          141  +</DL>
          142  +<DL>
          143  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
          144  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A>
          145  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          146  +</DD>
          147  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
          148  + <I>option</I>
          149  +</DD>
          150  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
          151  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          152  +</DD>
          153  +</DL>
          154  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
          155  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
          156  +<P>
          157  +
          158  +LabelEntry is a widget composed of <A HREF="LabelFrame.html">LabelFrame</A> widget
          159  +containing an <A HREF="Entry.html">Entry</A> widget.
          160  +Tk entry command can also be used on LabelEntry widget.
          161  +
          162  +</P>
          163  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          164  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          165  +<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A>
          166  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          167  +</DT><DD>
          168  +
          169  +Set bindings on the entry widget.
          170  +
          171  +</DD></DL>
          172  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          173  + <I>option</I>
          174  +</DT><DD>
          175  +
          176  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          177  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          178  +</DD></DL>
          179  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          180  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          181  +</DT><DD>
          182  +
          183  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          184  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          185  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          186  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          187  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          188  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          189  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          190  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          191  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          192  +
          193  +</DD></DL>
          194  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/LabelFrame.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>LabelFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>LabelFrame</B>
            6  + - Frame with a Label
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>LabelFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +</TABLE></DD>
           20  +</DL>
           21  +<DL>
           22  +<DT><I><A HREF="Label.html">OPTIONS from <B>Label</B></A></I></DT>
           23  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           24  +<TR>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-anchor</TD>
           26  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
           27  +</TR>
           28  +<TR>
           29  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-bitmap</TD>
           30  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
           31  +</TR>
           32  +<TR>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-focus</TD>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
           35  +</TR>
           36  +<TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
           38  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-height</TD>
           39  +</TR>
           40  +<TR>
           41  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
           42  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
           43  +</TR>
           44  +<TR>
           45  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
           46  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-image</TD>
           47  +</TR>
           48  +<TR>
           49  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
           50  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-name</TD>
           51  +</TR>
           52  +<TR>
           53  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
           54  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
           55  +</TR>
           56  +<TR>
           57  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
           58  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
           59  +</TR>
           60  +<TR>
           61  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
           62  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-underline</TD>
           63  +</TR>
           64  +<TR>
           65  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
           66  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-wraplength</TD>
           67  +</TABLE></DD>
           68  +</DL>
           69  +<DL>
           70  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           71  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           72  +<TR>
           73  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR>
           74  +</TABLE></DD>
           75  +</DL>
           76  +<DL>
           77  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           78  +<DD>LabelFrame::<A HREF="#align"><B>align</B></A>
           79  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
           80  +</DD>
           81  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           82  + <I>option</I>
           83  +</DD>
           84  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           85  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           86  +</DD>
           87  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
           88  +</DD>
           89  +</DL>
           90  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           91  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           92  +<P>
           93  +
           94  +LabelFrame enables user to create a frame with a
           95  +<A HREF="Label.html">Label</A> positionned at any side.
           96  +LabelFrame is used by <A HREF="ComboBox.html">ComboBox</A>
           97  +and <A HREF="SpinBox.html">SpinBox</A>.
           98  +</P>
           99  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          100  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
          101  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          102  +<DD>
          103  +
          104  +Specifies where to position the Label relative to the user frame: <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B>, <B>left</B> or <B>right</B>.
          105  +</DD>
          106  +</DL>
          107  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          108  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          109  +<DL><DT><A NAME="align">LabelFrame::<B>align</B></A>
          110  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          111  +</DT><DD>
          112  +
          113  +This command align label of all widget given by <I>args</I> of class LabelFrame
          114  +(or "derived") by setting their width to the max one +1
          115  +
          116  +</DD></DL>
          117  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          118  + <I>option</I>
          119  +</DT><DD>
          120  +
          121  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          122  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          123  +</DD></DL>
          124  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          125  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          126  +</DT><DD>
          127  +
          128  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          129  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          130  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          131  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          132  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          133  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          134  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          135  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          136  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          137  +
          138  +</DD></DL>
          139  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
          140  +</DT><DD>
          141  +
          142  +Return the frame where the user can create any other widget.
          143  +</DD></DL>
          144  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ListBox.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>ListBox</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>ListBox</B>
            6  + - ListBox widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ListBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
           26  +</TR>
           27  +<TR>
           28  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
           29  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD>
           30  +</TR>
           31  +<TR>
           32  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
           34  +</TR>
           35  +<TR>
           36  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD>
           38  +</TR>
           39  +</TABLE></DD>
           40  +</DL>
           41  +<DL>
           42  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           43  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           44  +<TR>
           45  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-autofocus">-autofocus</A></TD>
           46  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltax">-deltax</A></TD>
           47  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltay">-deltay</A></TD>
           48  +</TR>
           49  +<TR>
           50  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD>
           51  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD>
           52  +</TR>
           53  +<TR>
           54  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD>
           55  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD>
           56  +</TR>
           57  +<TR>
           58  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD>
           59  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD>
           60  +</TR>
           61  +<TR>
           62  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD>
           63  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD>
           64  +</TR>
           65  +<TR>
           66  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovermode">-dropovermode</A></TD>
           67  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD>
           68  +</TR>
           69  +<TR>
           70  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
           71  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-multicolumn">-multicolumn</A></TD>
           72  +</TR>
           73  +<TR>
           74  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD>
           75  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-redraw">-redraw</A></TD>
           76  +</TR>
           77  +<TR>
           78  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectfill">-selectfill</A></TD>
           79  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectmode">-selectmode</A></TD>
           80  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
           81  +</TABLE></DD>
           82  +</DL>
           83  +<DL>
           84  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           85  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindImage"><B>bindImage</B></A>
           86  + <I>event</I>
           87  + <I>script</I>
           88  +</DD>
           89  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindText"><B>bindText</B></A>
           90  + <I>event</I>
           91  + <I>script</I>
           92  +</DD>
           93  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           94  + <I>option</I>
           95  +</DD>
           96  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           97  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           98  +</DD>
           99  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
          100  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          101  +</DD>
          102  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#edit"><B>edit</B></A>
          103  + <I>item</I>
          104  + <I>text</I>
          105  + ?<I>verifycmd</I>?
          106  + ?<I>clickres</I>?
          107  + ?<I>select</I>?
          108  +</DD>
          109  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#exists"><B>exists</B></A>
          110  + <I>item</I>
          111  +</DD>
          112  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
          113  + <I>item</I>
          114  +</DD>
          115  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
          116  + <I>index</I>
          117  + <I>item</I>
          118  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
          119  +</DD>
          120  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#item"><B>item</B></A>
          121  + <I>first</I>
          122  + ?<I>last</I>?
          123  +</DD>
          124  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
          125  + <I>item</I>
          126  + <I>option</I>
          127  +</DD>
          128  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
          129  + <I>item</I>
          130  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          131  +</DD>
          132  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#items"><B>items</B></A>
          133  + ?<I>first</I>?
          134  + ?<I>last</I>?
          135  +</DD>
          136  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A>
          137  + <I>item</I>
          138  + <I>index</I>
          139  +</DD>
          140  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#reorder"><B>reorder</B></A>
          141  + <I>neworder</I>
          142  +</DD>
          143  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
          144  + <I>item</I>
          145  +</DD>
          146  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#selection"><B>selection</B></A>
          147  + <I>cmd</I>
          148  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          149  +</DD>
          150  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A>
          151  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          152  +</DD>
          153  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A>
          154  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          155  +</DD>
          156  +</DL>
          157  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
          158  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
          159  +<P>
          160  +
          161  +<B>ListBox</B> widget uses canvas to display a list of items.
          162  +Each item is composed of a label with its own font and foreground attributes, and an optional
          163  +image or window. Each item is drawn in a single line, whose height is defined by the
          164  +<B>deltay</B> option, so they must have at most this height.
          165  +A item is uniquely identified by a string given at creation (by the
          166  +<B>insert</B> command). The ListBox can have one or more columns, depending on
          167  +<B>multicolumn</B> option. The user do not handle columns; the number of columns
          168  +is determined following the height of the ListBox in order to see each item vertically.
          169  +
          170  +</P>
          171  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          172  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
          173  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-autofocus"><B>-autofocus (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          174  +<DD>
          175  +    If this option is true, the listbox will take focus any time the user
          176  +    clicks in it.  Without focus, the listbox's mouse wheel bindings will
          177  +    not work properly.  The default is true.
          178  +</DD>
          179  +</DL>
          180  +
          181  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT>
          182  +<DD>
          183  +
          184  +Specifies horizontal pad between each columns.
          185  +
          186  +</DD>
          187  +</DL>
          188  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltay"><B>-deltay</B></A></DT>
          189  +<DD>
          190  +
          191  +Specifies vertical size of the items.
          192  +
          193  +</DD>
          194  +</DL>
          195  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
          196  +<DD>
          197  +A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
          198  +</DD>
          199  +</DL>
          200  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
          201  +<DD>
          202  +
          203  +Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
          204  +<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
          205  +option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          206  +
          207  +</DD>
          208  +</DL>
          209  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
          210  +<DD>
          211  +
          212  +Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
          213  +Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
          214  +
          215  +</DD>
          216  +</DL>
          217  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
          218  +<DD>
          219  +
          220  +ListBox has a command wrapper for <I>drag-init</I> events. This command refused the drag
          221  +if no item is designated. In other cases:
          222  +<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, it returns:
          223  +<UL>
          224  +<LI>the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>LISTBOX_ITEM</I> if empty as the data type, 
          225  +<LI><I>{move copy link}</I> as the operations, 
          226  +<LI>the item identifier as the data.
          227  +</UL>
          228  +If <B>draginitcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
          229  +<UL>
          230  +<LI>the pathname of the listbox,
          231  +<LI>the identifier of the dragged item,
          232  +<LI>the toplevel created to represent dragged data.
          233  +</UL>
          234  +and must return a value conforming to <B>draginitcmd</B> option described in
          235  +<B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          236  +
          237  +</DD>
          238  +</DL>
          239  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
          240  +<DD>
          241  +
          242  +Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.
          243  +
          244  +</DD>
          245  +</DL>
          246  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
          247  +<DD>
          248  +
          249  +ListBox has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling
          250  +and extract item and position.
          251  +<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
          252  +<UL>
          253  +<LI>the pathname of the listbox,
          254  +<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
          255  +<LI>a list describing where the drop occurs. It can be:
          256  +<UL>
          257  +<LI><I>{</I><B>widget</B><I>}</I>,
          258  +<LI><I>{</I><B>item</B> <I>item}</I> or
          259  +<LI><I>{</I><B>position</B> <I>index}</I>.
          260  +</UL>
          261  +<LI>the current operation,
          262  +<LI>the data type,
          263  +<LI>the data.
          264  +</UL>
          265  +
          266  +<p>
          267  +The default drop command allows for drag-and-drop within the listbox but
          268  +not to or from other widgets.
          269  +</p>
          270  +
          271  +</DD>
          272  +</DL>
          273  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
          274  +<DD>
          275  +A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
          276  +</DD>
          277  +</DL>
          278  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
          279  +<DD>
          280  +
          281  +LsitBox has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling
          282  +and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>.
          283  +If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, the command is called with the following aguments:
          284  +<UL>
          285  +<LI>the pathname of the listbox,
          286  +<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
          287  +<LI>a list describing where the drop can occur, whose elements are:
          288  +<UL>
          289  +<LI>the string <I>widget</I> if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>w</I>, else empty string.
          290  +<LI>the targeted item if drag icon points an item and <B>dropovertype</B> option contains
          291  +<I>i</I>, else empty string.
          292  +<LI>an index within two items where drag icon points to if <B>dropovertype</B> option
          293  +contains <I>p</I>, else empty string.
          294  +<LI>optionally, the preferred method if drop can occur both inside an item and between two
          295  +items. The value is <I>position</I> or <I>item</I>.
          296  +</UL>
          297  +<LI>the current operation,
          298  +<LI>the data type,
          299  +<LI>the data.
          300  +</UL>
          301  +The command must return a list with two elements:
          302  +<UL>
          303  +<LI>the drop status, conforming to those described in <B>dropovercmd</B> option of
          304  +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>,
          305  +<LI>the choosen method: <I>widget</I>, <I>item</I> or <I>position</I>.
          306  +</UL>
          307  +
          308  +</DD>
          309  +</DL>
          310  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovermode"><B>-dropovermode</B></A></DT>
          311  +<DD>
          312  +
          313  +Specifies the type of <I>drop-over</I> interaction. Must be a combination of
          314  +<B>w</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs everywhere on widget,
          315  +<B>p</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs between two items,
          316  +and <B>i</B>, which specifies that drop occurs inside items.
          317  +
          318  +</DD>
          319  +</DL>
          320  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
          321  +<DD>
          322  +
          323  +Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
          324  +See option <B>droptypes</B> of
          325  +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          326  +for more infromation.
          327  +
          328  +<BR>Default is <I>LISTBOX_ITEM</I> with operations <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B>.
          329  +
          330  +</DD>
          331  +</DL>
          332  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
          333  +<DD>
          334  +
          335  +Specifies the desired height for the listbox in units of <B>deltay</B> pixels.
          336  +
          337  +</DD>
          338  +</DL>
          339  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-multicolumn"><B>-multicolumn</B></A></DT>
          340  +<DD>
          341  +
          342  +Specifies wether or not ListBox layouts items in order to see each one vertically.
          343  +
          344  +</DD>
          345  +</DL>
          346  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
          347  +<DD>
          348  +
          349  +Specifies distance between image or window and text of the items.
          350  +
          351  +</DD>
          352  +</DL>
          353  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-redraw"><B>-redraw</B></A></DT>
          354  +<DD>
          355  +
          356  +Specifies wether or not the listbox should be redrawn when entering idle.
          357  +Set it to false if you call <B>update</B> while modifying the listbox.
          358  +
          359  +</DD>
          360  +</DL>
          361  +
          362  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectfill"><B>-selectfill (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          363  +<DD>
          364  +    If true, the listbox will draw a selection rectangle that fills the
          365  +    listbox from left-to-right instead of just drawing a box around the
          366  +    selected item.  This more closely mimics the standard Tk listbox.
          367  +</DD>
          368  +</DL>
          369  +
          370  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectmode"><B>-selectmode</B></A></DT>
          371  +<DD>
          372  +
          373  +Specifies the desired selection-mode for the listbox. Must be one of
          374  +<B>none</B>, <B>single</B> or <B>multiple</B>. <B>selectmode</B> <I>single</I>
          375  +allows to select 1 item by its text or image. <B>selectmode</B> <I>multiple</I>
          376  +allows to select multiple items by their text or image. For more info on
          377  +selectmodes <I>single</I> or <I>multiple</I>, see the Tk <B>listbox</B>
          378  +command. Default value for <B>selectmode</B> is <I>none</I>.
          379  +
          380  +</DD>
          381  +</DL>
          382  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
          383  +<DD>
          384  +
          385  +Specifies the desired width for the listbox in units of 8 pixels.
          386  +
          387  +</DD>
          388  +</DL>
          389  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          390  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          391  +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindImage"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindImage</B></A>
          392  + <I>event</I>
          393  + <I>script</I>
          394  +</DT><DD>
          395  +
          396  +This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
          397  +sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the image of a item.
          398  +The item idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command.
          399  +
          400  +<p>
          401  +Any occurrence of <b>%W</b> in <i>script</i> is substituted with the
          402  +path of the listbox.
          403  +</p>
          404  +
          405  +</DD></DL>
          406  +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindText"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindText</B></A>
          407  + <I>event</I>
          408  + <I>script</I>
          409  +</DT><DD>
          410  +
          411  +This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
          412  +sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the label of a item.
          413  +The item idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command.
          414  +
          415  +<p>
          416  +Any occurrence of <b>%W</b> in <i>script</i> is substituted with the
          417  +path of the listbox.
          418  +</p>
          419  +
          420  +</DD></DL>
          421  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          422  + <I>option</I>
          423  +</DT><DD>
          424  +
          425  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          426  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          427  +</DD></DL>
          428  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          429  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          430  +</DT><DD>
          431  +
          432  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          433  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          434  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          435  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          436  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          437  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          438  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          439  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          440  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          441  +
          442  +</DD></DL>
          443  +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
          444  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          445  +</DT><DD>
          446  +
          447  +Deletes all items in <I>arg</I>. <I>arg</I> can be a list
          448  +of items or a list of list of items.
          449  +To delete all items, do <I>$pathName delete [$pathName items]</I>.
          450  +
          451  +</DD></DL>
          452  +<DL><DT><A NAME="edit"><I>pathName</I> <B>edit</B></A>
          453  + <I>item</I>
          454  + <I>text</I>
          455  + ?<I>verifycmd</I>?
          456  + ?<I>clickres</I>?
          457  + ?<I>select</I>?
          458  +</DT><DD>
          459  +
          460  +Provides a way for the user to edit in place the label of an item.
          461  +<BR>The command takes the initial text as argument and does not modify the label of the
          462  +edited node, but returns an empty string if edition is canceled, or the typed text
          463  +if edition is accepted.
          464  +<BR>When editing, the user can cancel by pressing Escape, or accept by pressing Return.
          465  +<BR><I>clickres</I> specifies what to do if the user click outside the editable area.
          466  +If <I>clickres</I> is 0 (the default), the edition is canceled.
          467  +If <I>clickres</I> is 1, the edition is accepted.
          468  +In all other case, the edition continues.
          469  +<BR>If edition is accepted and <I>modifycmd</I> is not empty, then it is called with
          470  +the new text as argument and must return 1 to accept the new text, 0 to refuse it
          471  +and continue edition.
          472  +<BR><I>select</I> specifies wether or not the initial text should be selected. Default is 1.
          473  +
          474  +</DD></DL>
          475  +<DL><DT><A NAME="exists"><I>pathName</I> <B>exists</B></A>
          476  + <I>item</I>
          477  +</DT><DD>
          478  +
          479  +Returns 1 if <I>item</I> exists in the listbox, else 0.
          480  +
          481  +</DD></DL>
          482  +<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
          483  + <I>item</I>
          484  +</DT><DD>
          485  +
          486  +Returns the position of <I>item</I> in the list.
          487  +
          488  +</DD></DL>
          489  +<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
          490  + <I>index</I>
          491  + <I>item</I>
          492  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
          493  +</DT><DD>
          494  +
          495  +<p>
          496  +Inserts a new item identified by <I>item</I> in the list at position <I>index</I>.
          497  +</p>
          498  +
          499  +<p>
          500  +Any instance of <i>#auto</i> within the item name will be replaced by the
          501  +number of the item in the order of insertion.
          502  +</p>
          503  +
          504  +<P>
          505  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-data"><B>-data</B></A></DT>
          506  +<DD>
          507  +
          508  +User data associated to the item.
          509  +
          510  +</DD>
          511  +</DL>
          512  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT>
          513  +<DD>
          514  +
          515  +Specifies the foreground color of the label of the item.
          516  +
          517  +</DD>
          518  +</DL>
          519  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-font"><B>-font</B></A></DT>
          520  +<DD>
          521  +
          522  +Specifies a font for the label of the item.
          523  +
          524  +</DD>
          525  +</DL>
          526  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT>
          527  +<DD>
          528  +
          529  +Specifies an image to display at the left of the label of the item.
          530  +<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
          531  +</DD>
          532  +</DL>
          533  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-indent"><B>-indent</B></A></DT>
          534  +<DD>
          535  +
          536  +Specifies the amount of extra space in pixels at the left of the item.
          537  +
          538  +</DD>
          539  +</DL>
          540  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
          541  +<DD>
          542  +
          543  +Specifies the label of the item.
          544  +
          545  +</DD>
          546  +</DL>
          547  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT>
          548  +<DD>
          549  +
          550  +Specifies a pathname to display at the left of the label of the item.
          551  +<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
          552  +</DD>
          553  +</DL>
          554  +</DD></DL>
          555  +<DL><DT><A NAME="item"><I>pathName</I> <B>item</B></A>
          556  + <I>first</I>
          557  + ?<I>last</I>?
          558  +</DT><DD>
          559  +
          560  +<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>items</I> instead.</B><BR>
          561  +If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the item at index <I>first</I> in the list, 
          562  +or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
          563  +If <I>last</I> is specified, the command returns a list whose elements are all
          564  +of the items between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>, inclusive. 
          565  +Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard forms for indices.
          566  +
          567  +</DD></DL>
          568  +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
          569  + <I>item</I>
          570  + <I>option</I>
          571  +</DT><DD>
          572  +
          573  +Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
          574  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
          575  +
          576  +</DD></DL>
          577  +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
          578  + <I>item</I>
          579  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          580  +</DT><DD>
          581  +
          582  +This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
          583  +options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
          584  +the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
          585  +item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
          586  +in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
          587  +returns a list describing the current options for the item.
          588  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          589  +
          590  +</DD></DL>
          591  +<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A>
          592  + ?<I>first</I>?
          593  + ?<I>last</I>?
          594  +</DT><DD>
          595  +
          596  +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all items.
          597  +If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the item at index
          598  +<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
          599  +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
          600  +are all of the items between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
          601  +inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
          602  +forms for indices.
          603  +
          604  +</DD></DL>
          605  +<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A>
          606  + <I>item</I>
          607  + <I>index</I>
          608  +</DT><DD>
          609  +
          610  +Moves <I>item</I> at position <I>index</I> in the list.
          611  +
          612  +</DD></DL>
          613  +<DL><DT><A NAME="reorder"><I>pathName</I> <B>reorder</B></A>
          614  + <I>neworder</I>
          615  +</DT><DD>
          616  +
          617  +Modifies the order of items in the listbox given by <I>neworder</I>. Items that do not
          618  +appear in <I>neworder</I> are no moved.
          619  +
          620  +</DD></DL>
          621  +<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
          622  + <I>item</I>
          623  +</DT><DD>
          624  +
          625  +Arrange the scrolling area to make <I>item</I> visible.
          626  +
          627  +</DD></DL>
          628  +<DL><DT><A NAME="selection"><I>pathName</I> <B>selection</B></A>
          629  + <I>cmd</I>
          630  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          631  +</DT><DD>
          632  +
          633  +Modifies the list of selected items following <I>cmd</I>:
          634  +<DL>
          635  +<DT><B>clear</B>
          636  +<DD>remove all items of the selection.
          637  +<DT><B>set</B>
          638  +<DD>set the selection to all items in <I>arg</I>
          639  +<DT><B>add</B>
          640  +<DD>add all items of <I>arg</I> in the selection
          641  +<DT><B>remove</B>
          642  +<DD>remove all items of <I>arg</I> of the selection
          643  +<DT><B>get</B>
          644  +<DD>return the current selected items
          645  +</DL>
          646  +
          647  +</DD></DL>
          648  +<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A>
          649  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          650  +</DT><DD>
          651  +
          652  +Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
          653  +
          654  +</DD></DL>
          655  +<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A>
          656  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          657  +</DT><DD>
          658  +
          659  +Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
          660  +
          661  +</DD></DL>
          662  +
          663  +
          664  +<b>BINDINGS</b>
          665  +
          666  +<p>
          667  +A <b>&lt;&lt;ListboxSelect&gt;&gt;</b> virtual event is generated any time the
          668  +selection in the listbox changes.
          669  +</p>
          670  +
          671  +<p>
          672  +The listbox has all the standard mouse wheel bindings when it has focus.
          673  +</p>
          674  +</p>
          675  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/MainFrame.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>MainFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>MainFrame</B>
            6  + - Manage toplevel with menu, toolbar and statusbar 
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>MainFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I><A HREF="ProgressBar.html">OPTIONS from <B>ProgressBar</B></A></I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progressfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progressmax (see <B>-maximum</B>)</TD>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progresstype (see <B>-type</B>)</TD>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progressvar (see <B>-variable</B>)</TD>
           25  +</TR>
           26  +</TABLE></DD>
           27  +</DL>
           28  +<DL>
           29  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           30  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           31  +<TR>
           32  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD></TR>
           33  +<TR>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-menu">-menu</A></TD>
           35  +</TR>
           36  +<TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-separator">-separator</A></TD></TR>
           38  +<TR>
           39  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
           40  +</TR>
           41  +<TR>
           42  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD></TR>
           43  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-sizegrip">-sizegrip</A></TR>
           44  +</TABLE></DD>
           45  +</DL>
           46  +<DL>
           47  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           48  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#addindicator"><B>addindicator</B></A>
           49  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
           50  +</DD>
           51  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#addtoolbar"><B>addtoolbar</B></A>
           52  +</DD>
           53  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           54  + <I>option</I>
           55  +</DD>
           56  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           57  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           58  +</DD>
           59  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
           60  +</DD>
           61  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getindicator"><B>getindicator</B></A>
           62  + <I>index</I>
           63  +</DD>
           64  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getmenu"><B>getmenu</B></A>
           65  + <I>menuid</I>
           66  +</DD>
           67  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#gettoolbar"><B>gettoolbar</B></A>
           68  + <I>index</I>
           69  +</DD>
           70  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setmenustate"><B>setmenustate</B></A>
           71  + <I>tag</I>
           72  + <I>state</I>
           73  +</DD>
           74  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#showstatusbar"><B>showstatusbar</B></A>
           75  + <I>name</I>
           76  +</DD>
           77  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#showtoolbar"><B>showtoolbar</B></A>
           78  + <I>index</I>
           79  + <I>bool</I>
           80  +</DD>
           81  +</DL>
           82  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           83  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           84  +<P>
           85  +
           86  +MainFrame manage toplevel to have:<BR>
           87  +<UL>
           88  +<LI>simple menu creation, with automatic accelerator bindings and
           89  +<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> association,</LI>
           90  +<LI>one or more toolbars that user can hide,</LI>
           91  +<LI>a status bar, displaying a user message or a menu description, and optionally a
           92  +<A HREF="ProgressBar.html">ProgressBar</A>.</LI>
           93  +</UL>
           94  +</P>
           95  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           96  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           97  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
           98  +<DD>
           99  +
          100  +Specifies the desired height for the user frame in any of the forms acceptable to
          101  +Tk_GetPixels. If this option is less than or equal to zero (the default) then the window
          102  +will not request any size at all.
          103  +</DD>
          104  +</DL>
          105  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-menu"><B>-menu (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          106  +<DD>
          107  +
          108  +This option describes the menu. This is a list whose each five elements describe
          109  +one cascade menu. It has the following form:
          110  +{<I>menuname</I> <I>tags</I> <I>menuId</I> <I>tearoff</I> <I>menuentries</I>...}
          111  +where <I>menuentries</I> is a list where each element describe one menu entry, which can be:
          112  +<UL>
          113  +<LI>for a separator:<BR>
          114  +  {<B>separator</B>}</LI>
          115  +<LI>for a command:<BR>
          116  +  {<B>command</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I>? ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI>
          117  +<LI>for a check button:<BR>
          118  +  {<B>checkbutton</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I>? ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI>
          119  +<LI>for a radio button:<BR>
          120  +  {<B>radiobutton</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI>
          121  +<LI>for a cascade menu:<BR>
          122  +  {<B>cascade</B> <I>menuname</I> <I>tags</I> <I>menuId</I> <I>tearoff</I> <I>menuentries</I>}</LI>
          123  +</UL>
          124  +where:
          125  +<UL>
          126  +<LI><I>menuname</I> is the name of the menu. If it contains a &amp;, the following character
          127  +is automatically converted to the corresponding <B>-underline</B> option of <B>menu add</B>
          128  +command.</LI>
          129  +<LI><I>tags</I> is the tags list for the entry, used for enabling or disabling menu
          130  +entries with <B>MainFrame::setmenustate</B>.</LI>
          131  +<LI><I>menuId</I> is an id for the menu, from which you can get menu pathname with
          132  + <B>MainFrame::getmenu</B>.</LI>
          133  +<LI><I>tearoff</I> specifies if menu has tearoff entry.</LI>
          134  +<LI><I>description</I> specifies a string for <A HREF=\"DynamicHelp.html\">DynamicHelp</A>.</LI>
          135  +<LI><I>accelerator</I> specifies a key sequence. It is a list of two elements, where the first
          136  +is one of <B>Shift</B>, <B>Ctrl</B>, <B>Alt</B>, <B>CtrlAlt</B>, <B>Cmd</B>,  or <B>ShiftCmd</B>, and the second as letter
          137  +(see <A HREF="#-casesensitive">-casesensitive</A> option for interpretation),  digit or
          138  +a special key name.
          139  +An accelerator string is build and corresponding binding set on the toplevel to invoke the
          140  +menu entry.</LI>
          141  +<LI><I>option value</I> specifies additionnal options for the entry (see <B>menu add</B>
          142  +command).</LI>
          143  +</UL>
          144  +Each value enclosed by ? are optional and defaulted to empty string, but must be
          145  +provided if one or more following options is not empty.
          146  +<BR>Example:
          147  +<PRE>
          148  +set descmenu {
          149  +    "&File" {} {} 0 {
          150  +        {command "&New"     {} "Create a new document"     {Ctrl n} -command Menu::new}
          151  +        {command "&Open..." {} "Open an existing document" {Ctrl o} -command Menu::open}
          152  +        {command "&Save"    open "Save the document" {Ctrl s} -command Menu::save}
          153  +        {cascade  "&Export"  {} export 0 {
          154  +            {command "Format &1" open "Export document to format 1" {} -command {Menu::export 1}}
          155  +            {command "Format &2" open "Export document to format 2" {} -command {Menu::export 2}}
          156  +        }}
          157  +        {separator}
          158  +        {cascade "&Recent files" {} recent 0 {}}
          159  +        {separator}
          160  +        {command "E&xit" {} "Exit the application" {} -command Menu::exit}
          161  +    }
          162  +    "&Options" {} {} 0 {
          163  +        {checkbutton "Toolbar" {} "Show/hide toolbar" {}
          164  +            -variable Menu::_drawtoolbar
          165  +            -command  {$Menu::_mainframe showtoolbar toolbar $Menu::_drawtoolbar}
          166  +        }
          167  +    }
          168  +}
          169  +</PRE>
          170  +
          171  +</DD>
          172  +</DL>
          173  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-separator"><B>-separator (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          174  +<DD>
          175  +
          176  +Specifies if separator should be drawn at the top and/or at the bottom of the user window.
          177  +Must be one of the values <B>none</B>, <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B> or <B>both</B>.
          178  +It depends on the relief of subwidgets of user window.
          179  +</DD>
          180  +</DL>
          181  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-textvariable"><B>-textvariable</B></A></DT>
          182  +<DD>
          183  +
          184  +Specifies the textvariable option for the label of the status bar.
          185  +<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> description
          186  +of menu entries are mapped to this variable at the creation of the MainFrame.
          187  +If this variable is changed by MainFrame::configure, menu description will
          188  +not be available.
          189  +<BR>You change the text of the label by modifying the value of the variable.
          190  +</DD>
          191  +</DL>
          192  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
          193  +<DD>
          194  +
          195  +Specifies the desired width for the user frame in any of the forms acceptable to
          196  +Tk_GetPixels. If this option is less than or equal to zero (the default) then the window
          197  +will not request any size at all.
          198  +</DD>
          199  +</DL>
          200  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-sizegrip"><B>-sizegrip (themed, read-only)</B></A></DT>
          201  +<DD>
          202  +
          203  +If bool argument is true and themed mode, show a ttk sizegrip widget in the lower-right corner.
          204  +</DD>
          205  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          206  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          207  +<DL><DT><A NAME="addindicator"><I>pathName</I> <B>addindicator</B></A>
          208  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          209  +</DT><DD>
          210  +
          211  +Add an indicator box at the right of the status bar. Each indicator are added from left
          212  +to right. An indicator is a Tk label widget configured with option-value pair
          213  +given by ?<I>arg...</I>?. <B>-relief</B> and <B>-borderwidth</B> options are respetively
          214  +defaulted to <I>sunken</I> and 1. Returns the pathname of the created label.
          215  +</DD></DL>
          216  +<DL><DT><A NAME="addtoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>addtoolbar</B></A>
          217  +</DT><DD>
          218  +
          219  +Add a toolbar to the MainFrame. Returns the pathname of the new window where to place
          220  +toolbar items.
          221  +</DD></DL>
          222  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          223  + <I>option</I>
          224  +</DT><DD>
          225  +
          226  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          227  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          228  +</DD></DL>
          229  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          230  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          231  +</DT><DD>
          232  +
          233  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          234  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          235  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          236  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          237  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          238  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          239  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          240  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          241  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          242  +
          243  +</DD></DL>
          244  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
          245  +</DT><DD>
          246  +
          247  +Returns the pathname of the user window.
          248  +</DD></DL>
          249  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getindicator"><I>pathName</I> <B>getindicator</B></A>
          250  + <I>index</I>
          251  +</DT><DD>
          252  +
          253  +Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added indicator.
          254  +</DD></DL>
          255  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getmenu"><I>pathName</I> <B>getmenu</B></A>
          256  + <I>menuid</I>
          257  +</DT><DD>
          258  +
          259  +Returns the pathname of the menu whose id is <I>menuid</I>.
          260  +</DD></DL>
          261  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getmenustate"><I>pathName</I> <B>getmenustate</B></A>
          262  + <I>tag</I>
          263  + <I>state</I>
          264  +</DT><DD>
          265  +
          266  +Returns the state of the given menu <I>tag</I>.
          267  +</DD></DL>
          268  +<DL><DT><A NAME="gettoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>gettoolbar</B></A>
          269  + <I>index</I>
          270  +</DT><DD>
          271  +
          272  +Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added toolbar.
          273  +</DD></DL>
          274  +<DL><DT><A NAME="setmenustate"><I>pathName</I> <B>setmenustate</B></A>
          275  + <I>tag</I>
          276  + <I>state</I>
          277  +</DT><DD>
          278  +
          279  +Set the <B>-state</B> option value of all the menu entries that have the tag <I>tag</I>
          280  +to <I>state</I>.
          281  +A menu entry is disabled, if one of its associated tags have state <B>disabled</B>.
          282  +
          283  +</DD></DL>
          284  +<DL><DT><A NAME="showstatusbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>showstatusbar</B></A>
          285  + <I>name</I>
          286  +</DT><DD>
          287  +
          288  +<I>name</I> is one of <B>none</B>, <B>status</B> or <B>progression</B>.
          289  +Use <B>none</B> to hide the status bar, <B>status</B> to display the label only, or
          290  +<B>progression</B> to display the label and the
          291  +<A HREF="ProgressBar.html">ProgressBar</A>.
          292  +</DD></DL>
          293  +<DL><DT><A NAME="showtoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>showtoolbar</B></A>
          294  + <I>index</I>
          295  + <I>bool</I>
          296  +</DT><DD>
          297  +
          298  +Hide if <I>bool</I> is 0, or show if <I>bool</I> is 1 the <I>index</I>th added toolbar.
          299  +To prevent your toplevel from resizing while hiding/showing toolbar,
          300  +do [wm geometry $top [wm geometry $top]] when it is managed.
          301  +</DD></DL>
          302  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/MessageDlg.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>MessageDlg</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>MessageDlg</B>
            6  + - Message dialog box
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>MessageDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TD>
           25  +</TABLE></DD>
           26  +</DL>
           27  +<DL>
           28  +<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT>
           29  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           30  +<TR>
           31  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
           32  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-cancel</TD>
           33  +</TR>
           34  +<TR>
           35  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-default</TD>
           36  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-parent</TD>
           37  +</TR>
           38  +</TABLE></DD>
           39  +</DL>
           40  +<DL>
           41  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           42  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           43  +<TR>
           44  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-aspect">-aspect</A></TD>
           45  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-buttons">-buttons</A></TD>
           46  +</TR>
           47  +<TR>
           48  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-buttonwidth">-buttonwidth</A></TD>
           49  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-icon">-icon</A></TD>
           50  +</TR>
           51  +<TR>
           52  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-justify">-justify</A></TD>
           53  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-message">-message</A></TD>
           54  +</TR>
           55  +<TR>
           56  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TD>
           57  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TD>
           58  +<TR>
           59  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
           60  +</TR>
           61  +</TR>
           62  +</TABLE></DD>
           63  +</DL>
           64  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           65  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           66  +<P>
           67  +
           68  +MessageDlg provides a simple way to display a message dialog.
           69  +MessageDlg::<B>create</B> creates the message dialog, displays
           70  +it and return the index of the pressed button, or -1 if it is destroyed.
           71  +When returning, the dialog no longer exists.
           72  +
           73  +</P>
           74  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           75  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           76  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-aspect"><B>-aspect</B></A></DT>
           77  +<DD>
           78  +
           79  +Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating desired
           80  +aspect ratio for the text.  The aspect ratio is specified as
           81  +100*width/height.  100 means the text should
           82  +be as wide as it is tall, 200 means the text should
           83  +be twice as wide as it is tall, 50 means the text should
           84  +be twice as tall as it is wide, and so on.
           85  +Used to choose line length for text if <B>width</B> option
           86  +isn't specified.
           87  +Defaults to 150.
           88  +
           89  +</DD>
           90  +</DL>
           91  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-buttons"><B>-buttons</B></A></DT>
           92  +<DD>
           93  +
           94  +Specifies a list of buttons to display when <B>type</B> option is <I>user</I>.
           95  +If a button has a symbolic name, its associated text will be displayed.
           96  +
           97  +</DD>
           98  +</DL>
           99  +
          100  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-buttonwidth"><B>-buttonwidth</B></A></DT>
          101  +<DD>
          102  +    Specifies the standard width of the buttons in the dialog.
          103  +</DD>
          104  +</DL>
          105  +
          106  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-icon"><B>-icon</B></A></DT>
          107  +<DD>
          108  +
          109  +Specifies an icon to display. Must be one of the following: <B>error</B>, <B>info</B>,
          110  +<B>question</B> or <B>warning</B>.
          111  +
          112  +</DD>
          113  +</DL>
          114  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-justify"><B>-justify</B></A></DT>
          115  +<DD>
          116  +
          117  +Specifies how to justify lines of text.
          118  +Must be one of <B>left</B>, <B>center</B>, or <B>right</B>.  Defaults
          119  +to <B>left</B>.
          120  +This option works together with the <B>anchor</B>, <B>aspect</B>,
          121  +<B>padx</B>, <B>pady</B>, and <B>width</B> options to provide a variety
          122  +of arrangements of the text within the window.
          123  +The <B>aspect</B> and <B>width</B> options determine the amount of
          124  +screen space needed to display the text.
          125  +The <B>anchor</B>, <B>padx</B>, and <B>pady</B> options determine where this
          126  +rectangular area is displayed within the widget's window, and the
          127  +<B>justify</B> option determines how each line is displayed within that
          128  +rectangular region.
          129  +For example, suppose <B>anchor</B> is <B>e</B> and <B>justify</B> is
          130  +<B>left</B>, and that the message window is much larger than needed
          131  +for the text.
          132  +The the text will displayed so that the left edges of all the lines
          133  +line up and the right edge of the longest line is <B>padx</B> from
          134  +the right side of the window;  the entire text block will be centered
          135  +in the vertical span of the window.
          136  +
          137  +</DD>
          138  +</DL>
          139  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-message"><B>-message</B></A></DT>
          140  +<DD>
          141  +
          142  +Specifies the message to display in this message box.
          143  +
          144  +</DD>
          145  +</DL>
          146  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
          147  +<DD>
          148  +
          149  +Specifies a string to display as the title of the message box.
          150  +If the value is empty (the default), a default title will be set corresponding
          151  +to the <B>icon</B> option.
          152  +The default associated title is in english, and can be modified to set it in
          153  +another language by specifying the resource:
          154  +<PRE>    *MessageDlg.<I>name</I>Title:   <I>value</I></PRE>
          155  +or the equivalent tcl command:
          156  +<PRE>    option add *MessageDlg.<I>name</I>Title <I>value</I></PRE>
          157  +where <I>name</I> is the name of an icon as defined in the <B>icon</B> option.
          158  +<BR>For example, for french language, you can specify for a warning dialog:
          159  +<PRE>    option add *MessageDlg.warningTitle  "Attention"</PRE>
          160  +
          161  +</DD>
          162  +</DL>
          163  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
          164  +<DD>
          165  +
          166  +Specifies a set of buttons to be displayed. The following values are possible:
          167  +<DD>
          168  +<P>
          169  +<DL COMPACT>
          170  +<DT>
          171  +<B>abortretryignore</B>
          172  +<DD>
          173  +Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are <B>abort</B>,
          174  +<B>retry</B> and <B>ignore</B>.<P>
          175  +<DT>
          176  +<B>ok</B>
          177  +<DD>
          178  +Displays one button whose symbolic name is <B>ok</B>.<P>
          179  +<DT>
          180  +<B>okcancel</B>
          181  +<DD>
          182  +Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>ok</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P>
          183  +<DT>
          184  +<B>retrycancel</B>
          185  +<DD>
          186  +Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>retry</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P>
          187  +<DT>
          188  +<B>yesno</B>
          189  +<DD>
          190  +Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>yes</B> and <B>no</B>.<P>
          191  +<DT>
          192  +<B>yesnocancel</B>
          193  +<DD>
          194  +Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are <B>yes</B>, <B>no</B>
          195  +and <B>cancel</B>.
          196  +<P>
          197  +<DT>
          198  +<B>user</B>
          199  +<DD>
          200  +Displays buttons of <B>-buttons</B> option.<P>
          201  +<DT>
          202  +</DL COMPACT>
          203  +
          204  +</DD>
          205  +</DL>
          206  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
          207  +<DD>
          208  +
          209  +Specifies the length of lines in the window.
          210  +If this option has a value greater than zero then the <B>aspect</B>
          211  +option is ignored and the <B>width</B> option determines the line
          212  +length.
          213  +If this option has a value less than or equal to zero, then
          214  +the <B>aspect</B> option determines the line length.
          215  +
          216  +</DD>
          217  +</DL>
          218  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/NoteBook.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>NoteBook</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>NoteBook</B>
            6  + - Notebook manager widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>NoteBook</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
           17  +</TABLE></DD>
           18  +</DL>
           19  +<DL>
           20  +<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT>
           21  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           22  +<TR>
           23  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-activebackground</TD>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-activeforeground</TD>
           25  +</TR>
           26  +<TR>
           27  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
           28  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
           29  +</TR>
           30  +<TR>
           31  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
           32  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
           33  +</TR>
           34  +<TR>
           35  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatdelay</TD>
           36  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatinterval</TD>
           37  +</TR>
           38  +</TABLE></DD>
           39  +</DL>
           40  +<DL>
           41  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           42  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           43  +<TR>
           44  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-arcradius">-arcradius</A></TD>
           45  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
           46  +</TR>
           47  +<TR>
           48  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-homogeneous">-homogeneous</A></TD>
           49  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TD>
           50  +</TR>
           51  +<TR>
           52  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-tabbevelsize">-tabbevelsize</A></TD>
           53  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-tabpady">-tabpady</A></TD>
           54  +</TR>
           55  +<TR>
           56  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
           57  +</TR>
           58  +</TABLE></DD>
           59  +</DL>
           60  +<DL>
           61  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           62  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindtabs"><B>bindtabs</B></A>
           63  + <I>event</I>
           64  + <I>script</I>
           65  +</DD>
           66  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           67  + <I>option</I>
           68  +</DD>
           69  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#compute_size"><B>compute_size</B></A>
           70  +</DD>
           71  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           72  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           73  +</DD>
           74  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
           75  + <I>page</I>
           76  + ?<I>destroyframe</I>?
           77  +</DD>
           78  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
           79  + <I>page</I>
           80  +</DD>
           81  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
           82  + <I>page</I>
           83  +</DD>
           84  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
           85  + <I>index</I>
           86  + <I>page</I>
           87  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
           88  +</DD>
           89  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
           90  + <I>page</I>
           91  + <I>option</I>
           92  +</DD>
           93  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
           94  + <I>page</I>
           95  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           96  +</DD>
           97  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A>
           98  + <I>page</I>
           99  + <I>index</I>
          100  +</DD>
          101  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#page"><B>page</B></A>
          102  + <I>first</I>
          103  + ?<I>last</I>?
          104  +</DD>
          105  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#pages"><B>pages</B></A>
          106  + ?<I>first</I>?
          107  + ?<I>last</I>?
          108  +</DD>
          109  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#raise"><B>raise</B></A>
          110  + ?<I>page</I>?
          111  +</DD>
          112  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
          113  + <I>page</I>
          114  +</DD>
          115  +</DL>
          116  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
          117  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
          118  +<P>
          119  +
          120  +NoteBook widget manage a set of pages and displays one of them.
          121  +
          122  +</P>
          123  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          124  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
          125  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-arcradius"><B>-arcradius</B></A></DT>
          126  +<DD>
          127  +
          128  +Specifies the amount of rounding effect at the corners of a tab. This value
          129  +can be adjusted from 0 to 8 pixels with the default being 2 pixels. Usually,
          130  +small values are preferable.
          131  +</DD>
          132  +</DL>
          133  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
          134  +<DD>
          135  +
          136  +Specifies the desired height for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
          137  +then the window will not request any size at all.
          138  +In this case, user may want to call NoteBook::<B>compute_size</B> to make NoteBook larger
          139  +enough to contains the largest page.
          140  +</DD>
          141  +</DL>
          142  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-homogeneous"><B>-homogeneous</B></A></DT>
          143  +<DD>
          144  +
          145  +Specifies wether or not the label of the pages must have the same width.
          146  +
          147  +</DD>
          148  +</DL>
          149  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side</B></A></DT>
          150  +<DD>
          151  +
          152  +Specifies the side where to place the label of the pages. Must be one
          153  +of <B>top</B> or <B>bottom</B>.
          154  +
          155  +</DD>
          156  +</DL>
          157  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-tabbevelsize"><B>-tabbevelsize</B></A></DT>
          158  +<DD>
          159  +
          160  +Specifies the amount of bevel the tabs should have. This value can be adjusted from
          161  +0 to 8 pixels with the default being 0 pixels. A zero pixel bevel is essentially rectangular
          162  +while non-zero bevel size will look trapezoidal.
          163  +</DD>
          164  +</DL>
          165  +
          166  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-tabpady"><B>-tabpady</B></A></DT>
          167  +<DD>
          168  +    Specifies the padding between the text in the tab and the top and bottom
          169  +    of the tab.  Padding may be a list of two values to specify padding for
          170  +    top and bottom separately.  Padding defaults to {0 6}.
          171  +</DD>
          172  +</DL>
          173  +
          174  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
          175  +<DD>
          176  +
          177  +Specifies the desired width for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
          178  +then the window will not request any size at all.
          179  +In this case, user may want to call NoteBook::<B>compute_size</B> to make NoteBook larger
          180  +enough to contains the largest page.
          181  +</DD>
          182  +</DL>
          183  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          184  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          185  +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindtabs"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindtabs</B></A>
          186  + <I>event</I>
          187  + <I>script</I>
          188  +</DT><DD>
          189  +
          190  +This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
          191  +sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on a tab. The page identifier on which
          192  +the event occurs is appended to the command.
          193  +
          194  +</DD></DL>
          195  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          196  + <I>option</I>
          197  +</DT><DD>
          198  +
          199  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          200  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          201  +</DD></DL>
          202  +<DL><DT><A NAME="compute_size"><I>pathName</I> <B>compute_size</B></A>
          203  +</DT><DD>
          204  +
          205  +This command can be called to make the NoteBook large enough to contain the largest page.
          206  +Note that if all pages use -createcmd, they will have no requested size.
          207  +
          208  +</DD></DL>
          209  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          210  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          211  +</DT><DD>
          212  +
          213  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          214  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          215  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          216  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          217  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          218  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          219  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          220  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          221  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          222  +
          223  +</DD></DL>
          224  +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
          225  + <I>page</I>
          226  + ?<I>destroyframe</I>?
          227  +</DT><DD>
          228  +
          229  +Deletes the page <I>page</I>. If <I>destroyframe</I> is 1 (the default), the frame
          230  +associated to <I>page</I> is destroyed. If <I>destroyframe</I> is 0, the frame is not
          231  +destroyed and is reused by further call to <B>insert</B> with the same <I>page</I>.
          232  +
          233  +</DD></DL>
          234  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
          235  + <I>page</I>
          236  +</DT><DD>
          237  +
          238  +Returns the pathname of the page <I>page</I>.
          239  +
          240  +</DD></DL>
          241  +<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
          242  + <I>page</I>
          243  +</DT><DD>
          244  +
          245  +Return the numerical index corresponding to the item.
          246  +
          247  +</DD></DL>
          248  +<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
          249  + <I>index</I>
          250  + <I>page</I>
          251  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
          252  +</DT><DD>
          253  +
          254  +Insert a new page idendified by <I>page</I> at position <I>index</I> in the pages list.
          255  +<I>index</I> must be numeric or <B>end</B>. The pathname of the new page is returned.
          256  +
          257  +<P>
          258  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-createcmd"><B>-createcmd</B></A></DT>
          259  +<DD>
          260  +
          261  +Specifies a command to be called the first time the page is raised.
          262  +
          263  +</DD>
          264  +</DL>
          265  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT>
          266  +<DD>
          267  +
          268  +Specifies an image to display for the page at the left of the label
          269  +
          270  +</DD>
          271  +</DL>
          272  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-leavecmd"><B>-leavecmd</B></A></DT>
          273  +<DD>
          274  +
          275  +Specifies a command to be called when a page is about to be leaved.
          276  +The command must return 0 if the page can not be leaved, or 1 if it can.
          277  +
          278  +</DD>
          279  +</DL>
          280  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-raisecmd"><B>-raisecmd</B></A></DT>
          281  +<DD>
          282  +
          283  +Specifies a command to be called each time the page is raised.
          284  +
          285  +</DD>
          286  +</DL>
          287  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
          288  +<DD>
          289  +
          290  +Specifies the state of the page. Must be <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>.
          291  +
          292  +</DD>
          293  +</DL>
          294  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
          295  +<DD>
          296  +
          297  +Specifies a label to display for the page.
          298  +
          299  +</DD>
          300  +</DL>
          301  +</DD></DL>
          302  +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
          303  + <I>page</I>
          304  + <I>option</I>
          305  +</DT><DD>
          306  +
          307  +Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
          308  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
          309  +
          310  +</DD></DL>
          311  +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
          312  + <I>page</I>
          313  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          314  +</DT><DD>
          315  +
          316  +This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
          317  +options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
          318  +the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
          319  +item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
          320  +in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
          321  +returns a list describing the current options for the item.
          322  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          323  +
          324  +</DD></DL>
          325  +<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A>
          326  + <I>page</I>
          327  + <I>index</I>
          328  +</DT><DD>
          329  +
          330  +Moves <I>page</I> tab to index <I>index</I>.
          331  +
          332  +</DD></DL>
          333  +<DL><DT><A NAME="page"><I>pathName</I> <B>page</B></A>
          334  + <I>first</I>
          335  + ?<I>last</I>?
          336  +</DT><DD>
          337  +
          338  +<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>pages</I> instead.</B><BR>
          339  +If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the page at index <I>first</I>, or an empty string if
          340  +<I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. If <I>last</I> is specified, the command
          341  +returns a list whose elements are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
          342  +inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
          343  +forms for indices.
          344  +
          345  +</DD></DL>
          346  +<DL><DT><A NAME="pages"><I>pathName</I> <B>pages</B></A>
          347  + ?<I>first</I>?
          348  + ?<I>last</I>?
          349  +</DT><DD>
          350  +
          351  +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all pages.
          352  +If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the page at index
          353  +<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
          354  +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
          355  +are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
          356  +inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
          357  +forms for indices.
          358  +
          359  +</DD></DL>
          360  +<DL><DT><A NAME="raise"><I>pathName</I> <B>raise</B></A>
          361  + ?<I>page</I>?
          362  +</DT><DD>
          363  +
          364  +Raise the page <I>page</I>, or return the raised page if <I>page</I> is omitted.
          365  +
          366  +</DD></DL>
          367  +<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
          368  + <I>page</I>
          369  +</DT><DD>
          370  +
          371  +Scrolls labels to make the label of the page <I>page</I> visible.
          372  +
          373  +</DD></DL>
          374  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/PagesManager.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>PagesManager</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>PagesManager</B>
            6  + - Pages manager widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PagesManager</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background</A></TR>
           17  +</TABLE></DD>
           18  +</DL>
           19  +<DL>
           20  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           21  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           22  +<TR>
           23  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
           25  +</TR>
           26  +</TABLE></DD>
           27  +</DL>
           28  +<DL>
           29  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           30  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
           31  + <I>page</I>
           32  +</DD>
           33  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           34  + <I>option</I>
           35  +</DD>
           36  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#compute_size"><B>compute_size</B></A>
           37  +</DD>
           38  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           39  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           40  +</DD>
           41  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
           42  + <I>page</I>
           43  +</DD>
           44  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
           45  + <I>page</I>
           46  +</DD>
           47  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#page"><B>page</B></A>
           48  + <I>first</I>
           49  + ?<I>last</I>?
           50  +</DD>
           51  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#pages"><B>pages</B></A>
           52  + ?<I>first</I>?
           53  + ?<I>last</I>?
           54  +</DD>
           55  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#raise"><B>raise</B></A>
           56  + ?<I>page</I>?
           57  +</DD>
           58  +</DL>
           59  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           60  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           61  +<P>
           62  +
           63  +PagesManager widget manages a set of pages and displays one of them.
           64  +PagesManager does not provide any user access method, as NoteBook
           65  +does, so it can be done through a listbox, a menu, radiobutton, or
           66  +whatever.  The widget shows no pages during creation; there must be an
           67  +explicit call to <B>raise</B> to display one.
           68  +
           69  +</P>
           70  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           71  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           72  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
           73  +<DD>
           74  +
           75  +Specifies the desired height for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
           76  +then the window will not request any size at all.
           77  +In this case, user may want to call PagesManager::<B>compute_size</B> to make PagesManager
           78  +larger enough to contains the largest page.
           79  +</DD>
           80  +</DL>
           81  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
           82  +<DD>
           83  +
           84  +Specifies the desired width for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
           85  +then the window will not request any size at all.
           86  +In this case, user may want to call PagesManager::<B>compute_size</B> to make PagesManager
           87  +larger enough to contains the largest page.
           88  +</DD>
           89  +</DL>
           90  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           91  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
           92  +<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
           93  + <I>page</I>
           94  +</DT><DD>
           95  +
           96  +Add a new page identified by <I>page</I>, which is an arbitrary
           97  +identifier.  The pathname of the new page is returned and widgets for
           98  +the page should be created with this as the parent or ancestor.
           99  +However, PagesManager manages its own geometry. <B>pack</B>,
          100  +<B>grid</B> or an equivalent should not be used with the pathname
          101  +returned by <B>add</B>.
          102  +
          103  +</DD></DL>
          104  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          105  + <I>option</I>
          106  +</DT><DD>
          107  +
          108  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          109  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          110  +</DD></DL>
          111  +<DL><DT><A NAME="compute_size"><I>pathName</I> <B>compute_size</B></A>
          112  +</DT><DD>
          113  +
          114  +This command can be called to make the PagesManager large enough to contain the largest page.
          115  +
          116  +</DD></DL>
          117  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          118  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          119  +</DT><DD>
          120  +
          121  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          122  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          123  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          124  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          125  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          126  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          127  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          128  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          129  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          130  +
          131  +</DD></DL>
          132  +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
          133  + <I>page</I>
          134  +</DT><DD>
          135  +
          136  +Deletes the page <I>page</I>.
          137  +
          138  +</DD></DL>
          139  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
          140  + <I>page</I>
          141  +</DT><DD>
          142  +
          143  +Returns the pathname of the page <I>page</I>.
          144  +
          145  +</DD></DL>
          146  +<DL><DT><A NAME="page"><I>pathName</I> <B>page</B></A>
          147  + <I>first</I>
          148  + ?<I>last</I>?
          149  +</DT><DD>
          150  +
          151  +<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>pages</I> instead.</B><BR>
          152  +If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the page at index <I>first</I>, or an empty string if
          153  +<I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. If <I>last</I> is specified, the command
          154  +returns a list whose elements are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
          155  +inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
          156  +forms for indices.
          157  +
          158  +</DD></DL>
          159  +<DL><DT><A NAME="pages"><I>pathName</I> <B>pages</B></A>
          160  + ?<I>first</I>?
          161  + ?<I>last</I>?
          162  +</DT><DD>
          163  +
          164  +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all pages.
          165  +If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the page at index
          166  +<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
          167  +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
          168  +are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
          169  +inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
          170  +forms for indices.
          171  +
          172  +</DD></DL>
          173  +<DL><DT><A NAME="raise"><I>pathName</I> <B>raise</B></A>
          174  + ?<I>page</I>?
          175  +</DT><DD>
          176  +
          177  +Raise the page <I>page</I>, or return the raised page if <I>page</I> is omitted.
          178  +
          179  +</DD></DL>
          180  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/PanedWindow.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>PanedWindow</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>PanedWindow</B>
            6  + - Tiled layout manager widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PanedWindow</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           17  +</TABLE></DD>
           18  +</DL>
           19  +<DL>
           20  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           21  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           22  +<TR>
           23  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-activator">-activator</A></TD>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-pad">-pad</A></TD>
           25  +</TR>
           26  +<TR>
           27  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TD>
           28  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-weights">-weights</A></TD>
           29  +</TR>
           30  +<TR>
           31  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
           32  +</TR>
           33  +</TABLE></DD>
           34  +</DL>
           35  +<DL>
           36  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           37  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
           38  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
           39  +</DD>
           40  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           41  + <I>option</I>
           42  +</DD>
           43  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           44  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           45  +</DD>
           46  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
           47  + <I>index</I>
           48  +</DD>
           49  +</DL>
           50  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           51  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           52  +<P>
           53  +
           54  +PanedWindow is a widget that lays out children in
           55  +a vertically or horizontally tiled format.
           56  +The user can adjust the size of the panes, with a pane control sash created
           57  +between children.
           58  +</P>
           59  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           60  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           61  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-activator"><B>-activator (read-only)</B></A></DT>
           62  +<DD>
           63  +
           64  +By default, the control sash is either a button or a line depending
           65  +upon the underlying operating system.  This sash may be explicitly set
           66  +using this option.  If set to <B>line</B> then the sash consists of
           67  +just a dividing line.  Otherwise if set to <B>button</B> then it
           68  +constists of a knob that can be dragged.
           69  +
           70  +</DD>
           71  +</DL>
           72  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-pad"><B>-pad (read-only)</B></A></DT>
           73  +<DD>
           74  +
           75  +Specifies additional space between the button of the sash and children.
           76  +
           77  +</DD>
           78  +</DL>
           79  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT>
           80  +<DD>
           81  +
           82  +Specifies the side of the sash, which implies the layout: <B>top</B> or <B>bottom</B>
           83  +(horizontal layout), <B>left</B> or <B>right</B> (vertical layout).
           84  +</DD>
           85  +</DL>
           86  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-weights"><B>-weights (read-only)</B></A></DT>
           87  +<DD>
           88  +
           89  +Specifies how the weights specified when adding panes should be used. Must be
           90  +<B>extra</B> or <B>available</B>. When using <I>extra</I>, only extra space is
           91  +devided among the diffferent panes relative to their weight. When using
           92  +<I>available</I>, all space is devided among the diffferent panes relative to
           93  +their weight. Default value for <B>weights</B> is <I>extra</I>.
           94  +
           95  +</DD>
           96  +</DL>
           97  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width (read-only)</B></A></DT>
           98  +<DD>
           99  +
          100  +Specifies the width of the button of the sash.  This option is ignored
          101  +if the activator is set to <B>line</B>.
          102  +
          103  +</DD>
          104  +</DL>
          105  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          106  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          107  +<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
          108  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
          109  +</DT><DD>
          110  +
          111  +This command add a new pane. The new pane is placed below the previous pane for
          112  +vertical layout or at right for horizontal layout. This command returns a frame
          113  +where user can place its widget. Valid options are:
          114  +<P>
          115  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Pane-minsize"><B>-minsize</B></A></DT>
          116  +<DD>
          117  +
          118  +Specifies the minimum size requested for the pane.
          119  +See the <B>grid</B> command for more information.
          120  +</DD>
          121  +</DL>
          122  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Pane-weight"><B>-weight</B></A></DT>
          123  +<DD>
          124  +
          125  +Specifies the relative weight for apportioning any extra spaces among panes.
          126  +See the <B>grid</B> command for more information.
          127  +</DD>
          128  +</DL>
          129  +</DD></DL>
          130  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          131  + <I>option</I>
          132  +</DT><DD>
          133  +
          134  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          135  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          136  +</DD></DL>
          137  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          138  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          139  +</DT><DD>
          140  +
          141  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          142  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          143  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          144  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          145  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          146  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          147  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          148  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          149  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          150  +
          151  +</DD></DL>
          152  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
          153  + <I>index</I>
          154  +</DT><DD>
          155  +
          156  +Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added pane.
          157  +</DD></DL>
          158  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/PanelFrame.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>PanelFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>PanelFrame</B>
            6  + - Frame with a boxed title area
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PanelFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
           26  +</TR>
           27  +</TABLE></DD>
           28  +</DL>
           29  +<DL>
           30  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           31  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           32  +<TR>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
           35  +</TR>
           36  +<TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-panelbackground">-panelbackground</A></TD>
           38  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-panelforeground">-panelforeground</A></TR>
           39  +</TR>
           40  +<TR>
           41  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
           42  +</TR>
           43  +</TABLE></DD>
           44  +</DL>
           45  +<DL>
           46  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           47  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           48  + <I>option</I>
           49  +</DD>
           50  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           51  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           52  +</DD>
           53  +</DL>
           54  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           55  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           56  +
           57  +<P>
           58  +PanelFrame creates a frame area with a boxed title area.  The boxed title
           59  +area contains a label ands allows for other items to be placed in it.  This
           60  +can serve like a mini-toolbar.
           61  +</P>
           62  +
           63  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           64  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           65  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
           66  +<DD>
           67  +Specifies the desired height for the widget.
           68  +</DD>
           69  +<DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT>
           70  +<DD>
           71  +The spacing to place around individual panel area items.
           72  +</DD>
           73  +<DT><A NAME="-panelbackground"><B>-panelbackground</B></A></DT>
           74  +<DD>
           75  +The color for the panel area background.
           76  +Defaults to the selection highlight background color.
           77  +</DD>
           78  +<DT><A NAME="-panelforeground"><B>-panelforeground</B></A></DT>
           79  +<DD>
           80  +The color for the title text.
           81  +Defaults to the selection highlight foreground color.
           82  +</DD>
           83  +<DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
           84  +<DD>
           85  +Specifies the desired width for the widget.
           86  +</DD>
           87  +</DL>
           88  +
           89  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           90  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
           91  +<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> <B>widget</B>
           92  + ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           93  +</DT><DD>
           94  +Add a widget to the panel. Widgets are <B>pack</B>ed in.
           95  +Possible options are:
           96  +<DL>
           97  +<DT><B>-side</B></DT>
           98  +<DD>Side to place item on (defaults to <B>right</B>).</DD>
           99  +<DT><B>-fill</B></DT>
          100  +<DD>Whether to fill space (defaults to <B>none</B>).</DD>
          101  +<DT><B>-expand</B></DT>
          102  +<DD>Whether to expand space (defaults to <B>0</B>).</DD>
          103  +<DT><B>-pad</B></DT>
          104  +<DD>Override of the widget's <B>-ipad</B> option for this item.</DD>
          105  +</DL>
          106  +</DD>
          107  +</DL>
          108  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          109  + <I>option</I>
          110  +</DT><DD>
          111  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          112  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          113  +</DD>
          114  +</DL>
          115  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          116  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          117  +</DT><DD>
          118  +
          119  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no
          120  +<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
          121  +options for <I>pathName</I>.  If <I>option</I> is specified with no
          122  +<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named
          123  +<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of
          124  +the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more
          125  +<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the
          126  +given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command
          127  +returns an empty string.
          128  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          129  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          130  +</DD>
          131  +</DL>
          132  +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
          133  +<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...?
          134  +</DT><DD>
          135  +Delete a widget and associated state from the panel.</DD>
          136  +</DL>
          137  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
          138  +</DT><DD>
          139  +Get the frame widget for the status bar in which status bar items should be
          140  +created.</DD>
          141  +</DD>
          142  +</DL>
          143  +<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A>
          144  +</DT><DD>List of items in the status bar.</DD>
          145  +<DL>
          146  +<DL><DT><A NAME="remove"><I>pathName</I> <B>remove</B></A>
          147  +<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...?
          148  +</DT><DD>
          149  +Remove a widget item and associated state from the panel without destroying
          150  +the item.</DD>
          151  +</DL>
          152  +
          153  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/PasswdDlg.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>PasswdDlg</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>PasswdDlg</B>
            6  + - Login/Password dialog box
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PasswdDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-anchor</TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-homogeneous</TD>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-modal</TD>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
           26  +</TR>
           27  +<TR>
           28  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-parent</TD>
           29  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-spacing</TD>
           30  +</TR>
           31  +<TR>
           32  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-title</TD>
           33  +</TABLE></DD>
           34  +</DL>
           35  +<DL>
           36  +<DT><I><A HREF="LabelEntry.html">OPTIONS from <B>LabelEntry</B></A></I></DT>
           37  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           38  +<TR>
           39  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
           40  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
           41  +</TR>
           42  +<TR>
           43  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
           44  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg</TD>
           45  +</TR>
           46  +<TR>
           47  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg</TD>
           48  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
           49  +</TR>
           50  +<TR>
           51  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
           52  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
           53  +</TR>
           54  +<TR>
           55  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
           56  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
           57  +</TR>
           58  +<TR>
           59  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
           60  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
           61  +</TR>
           62  +<TR>
           63  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
           64  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
           65  +</TR>
           66  +<TR>
           67  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
           68  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
           69  +</TR>
           70  +<TR>
           71  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
           72  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelanchor</TD>
           73  +</TR>
           74  +<TR>
           75  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelfont</TD>
           76  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelheight</TD>
           77  +</TR>
           78  +<TR>
           79  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labeljustify</TD>
           80  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelwidth</TD>
           81  +</TR>
           82  +<TR>
           83  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginhelptext (see <B>-helptext</B>)</TD>
           84  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginhelpvar (see <B>-helpvar</B>)</TD>
           85  +</TR>
           86  +<TR>
           87  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginlabel (see <B>-label</B>)</TD>
           88  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-logintext (see <B>-text</B>)</TD>
           89  +</TR>
           90  +<TR>
           91  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-logintextvariable (see <B>-textvariable</B>)</TD>
           92  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginunderline (see <B>-underline</B>)</TD>
           93  +</TR>
           94  +<TR>
           95  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdeditable (see <B>-editable</B>)</TD>
           96  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdhelptext (see <B>-helptext</B>)</TD>
           97  +</TR>
           98  +<TR>
           99  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdhelpvar (see <B>-helpvar</B>)</TD>
          100  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdlabel (see <B>-label</B>)</TD>
          101  +</TR>
          102  +<TR>
          103  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdstate (see <B>-state</B>)</TD>
          104  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdtext (see <B>-text</B>)</TD>
          105  +</TR>
          106  +<TR>
          107  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdtextvariable (see <B>-textvariable</B>)</TD>
          108  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdunderline (see <B>-underline</B>)</TD>
          109  +</TR>
          110  +<TR>
          111  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-relief</TD>
          112  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
          113  +</TR>
          114  +<TR>
          115  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
          116  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
          117  +</TR>
          118  +<TR>
          119  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-wraplength</TD>
          120  +</TABLE></DD>
          121  +</DL>
          122  +<DL>
          123  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
          124  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
          125  +<TR>
          126  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
          127  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
          128  +</TR>
          129  +</TABLE></DD>
          130  +</DL>
          131  +<DL>
          132  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
          133  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
          134  + <I>option</I>
          135  +</DD>
          136  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
          137  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          138  +</DD>
          139  +</DL>
          140  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
          141  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
          142  +<P>
          143  +
          144  +PasswdDlg provides a simple way to display a login/password dialog.
          145  +PasswdDlg::<B>create</B> creates the dialog, displays it, and return the value of login
          146  +and password in a list, or an empty list if it is destroyed or user press cancel.
          147  +When returning, the dialog no longer exists.
          148  +<BR>Additionnal resources can be set to modify other text:
          149  +<PRE>
          150  +    *loginName     Label for login LabelEntry
          151  +    *passwordName  Label for password LabelEntry
          152  +</PRE>
          153  +
          154  +</P>
          155  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          156  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
          157  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
          158  +<DD>
          159  +
          160  +Specifies a command to call when user press ok button.
          161  +
          162  +</DD>
          163  +</DL>
          164  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
          165  +<DD>
          166  +
          167  +Specifies a set of buttons to be displayed. The following values are possible:
          168  +<DD>
          169  +<P>
          170  +<DL COMPACT>
          171  +<DT>
          172  +<B>ok</B>
          173  +<DD>
          174  +Displays one button whose symbolic name is <B>ok</B>.<P>
          175  +<DT>
          176  +<B>okcancel</B>
          177  +<DD>
          178  +Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>ok</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P>
          179  +</DL COMPACT>
          180  +
          181  +</DD>
          182  +</DL>
          183  +
          184  +</DD>
          185  +</DL>
          186  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          187  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          188  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          189  + <I>option</I>
          190  +</DT><DD>
          191  +
          192  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          193  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          194  +</DD></DL>
          195  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          196  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          197  +</DT><DD>
          198  +
          199  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          200  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          201  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          202  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          203  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          204  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          205  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          206  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          207  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          208  +
          209  +</DD></DL>
          210  +<HR>
          211  +
          212  +<ADRESS>Stephane Lavirotte <A HREF="mailto:Stephane.Lavirotte@sophia.inria.fr">(Stephane.Lavirotte@sophia.inria.fr)</A></ADRESS>
          213  +
          214  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ProgressBar.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>ProgressBar</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>ProgressBar</B>
            6  + - Progress indicator widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ProgressBar</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR>
           26  +</TR>
           27  +</TABLE></DD>
           28  +</DL>
           29  +<DL>
           30  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           31  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           32  +<TR>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-maximum">-maximum</A></TR>
           35  +</TR>
           36  +<TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
           38  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-variable">-variable</A></TR>
           39  +</TR>
           40  +<TR>
           41  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
           42  +</TABLE></DD>
           43  +</DL>
           44  +<DL>
           45  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           46  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           47  + <I>option</I>
           48  +</DD>
           49  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           50  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           51  +</DD>
           52  +</DL>
           53  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           54  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           55  +<P>
           56  +
           57  +ProgressBar widget indicates the user the progress of a lengthly operation.
           58  +It is used by <A HREF="MainFrame.html">MainFrame</A>
           59  +and <A HREF="ProgressDlg.html">ProgressDlg</A>.
           60  +</P>
           61  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           62  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           63  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
           64  +<DD>
           65  +
           66  +Specifies the desired height for the progress indicator.
           67  +</DD>
           68  +</DL>
           69  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-maximum"><B>-maximum</B></A></DT>
           70  +<DD>
           71  +
           72  +Specifies the maximum value of the variable.  This value must be
           73  +greater than zero.
           74  +
           75  +</DD>
           76  +</DL>
           77  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
           78  +<DD>
           79  +
           80  +Specifies the type of the ProgressBar. Must be one of <B>normal</B>,
           81  +<B>incremental</B>,  <B>infinite</B> or <B>nonincremental_infinite</B>.
           82  +
           83  +<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>normal</I>, the progress indicator is drawn
           84  +proportional to the variable value and <B>maximum</B> option each time the
           85  +variable is set.
           86  +
           87  +<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>incremental</I>, the value of the progress
           88  +indicator is maintained internally, and incremented each time the variable is
           89  +set by its value. The progress indicator is drawn proportional to the internal
           90  +value and
           91  +<B>maximum</B> option.
           92  +
           93  +<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>infinite</I>, the value of the progress indicator
           94  +is maintained internally, and incremented each time the variable is set by its
           95  +value. The progress indicator moves from left to right if internal value
           96  +(modulo <B>maximum</B>) is less than <B>maximum</B>/2, and from right to left
           97  +if internal value is greater than <B>maximum</B>/2.
           98  +
           99  +<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>nonincremental_infinite</I>, the value of the
          100  +progress indicator taken from the variable value, The progress indicator moves
          101  +from left to right if variable value (modulo <B>maximum</B>) is less than
          102  +<B>maximum</B>/2, and from right to left if internal value is greater than
          103  +<B>maximum</B>/2.
          104  +
          105  +<BR><BR>See <B>-variable</B> option for special case of its value,
          106  +
          107  +<BR><BR>Default value for <B>type</B> is <I>normal</I>.
          108  +
          109  +</DD>
          110  +</DL>
          111  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-variable"><B>-variable</B></A></DT>
          112  +<DD>
          113  +
          114  +Specifies the variable attached to the progress indicator.  Progress indicator
          115  +is updated when the value of the variable changes.  If the value of the
          116  +variable is negative, the progress indicator is not displayed (it is drawn flat
          117  +with <B>background</B> color - usefull for ProgressDlg to make it
          118  +invisible). If its value 0, progress indicator is reinitialized.
          119  +
          120  +</DD>
          121  +</DL>
          122  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
          123  +<DD>
          124  +
          125  +Specifies the desired width for the progress indicator.
          126  +</DD>
          127  +</DL>
          128  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          129  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          130  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          131  + <I>option</I>
          132  +</DT><DD>
          133  +
          134  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          135  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          136  +</DD></DL>
          137  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          138  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          139  +</DT><DD>
          140  +
          141  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          142  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          143  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          144  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          145  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          146  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          147  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          148  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          149  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          150  +
          151  +</DD></DL>
          152  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ProgressDlg.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>ProgressDlg</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>ProgressDlg</B>
            6  + - Progress indicator dialog box
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ProgressDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +</TABLE></DD>
           20  +</DL>
           21  +<DL>
           22  +<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT>
           23  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           24  +<TR>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
           26  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-parent</TD>
           27  +</TR>
           28  +<TR>
           29  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-separator</TD>
           30  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-title</TD>
           31  +</TR>
           32  +</TABLE></DD>
           33  +</DL>
           34  +<DL>
           35  +<DT><I><A HREF="ProgressBar.html">OPTIONS from <B>ProgressBar</B></A></I></DT>
           36  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           37  +<TR>
           38  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
           39  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
           40  +</TR>
           41  +<TR>
           42  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
           43  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-maximum</TD>
           44  +</TR>
           45  +<TR>
           46  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-relief</TD>
           47  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-troughcolor</TD>
           48  +</TR>
           49  +<TR>
           50  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-type</TD>
           51  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-variable</TD>
           52  +</TR>
           53  +</TABLE></DD>
           54  +</DL>
           55  +<DL>
           56  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           57  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           58  +<TR>
           59  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
           60  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
           61  +</TR>
           62  +<TR>
           63  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-stop">-stop</A></TR>
           64  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
           65  +</TR>
           66  +</TABLE></DD>
           67  +</DL>
           68  +<DL>
           69  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           70  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           71  + <I>option</I>
           72  +</DD>
           73  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           74  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           75  +</DD>
           76  +</DL>
           77  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           78  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           79  +<P>
           80  +
           81  +ProgressDlg provides a simple way to display a progress indicator dialog.
           82  +ProgressDlg::<B>create</B> creates the dialog, displays it, set a local
           83  +grab to it and immediatly return. The dialog is updated by modifying the 
           84  +value of the variable of options <B>-textvariable</B> and <B>-variable</B>.
           85  +You have to destroy the dialog after use.
           86  +
           87  +</P>
           88  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           89  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           90  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
           91  +<DD>
           92  +
           93  +Specifies a command to call when user press stop button.  Note that it
           94  +is the program's responsibility to periodically call <B>update</B> so
           95  +that button press events can be generated.
           96  +
           97  +</DD>
           98  +</DL>
           99  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
          100  +<DD>
          101  +
          102  +Specifies a desired height for the label in lines of text.
          103  +
          104  +</DD>
          105  +</DL>
          106  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-stop"><B>-stop</B></A></DT>
          107  +<DD>
          108  +
          109  +Specifies the text of the button typically used to stop process. If empty, no button will
          110  +be drawn. This can be a symbolic name.
          111  +
          112  +</DD>
          113  +</DL>
          114  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
          115  +<DD>
          116  +
          117  +Specifies a desired width for the label in characters.
          118  +
          119  +</DD>
          120  +</DL>
          121  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          122  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          123  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          124  + <I>option</I>
          125  +</DT><DD>
          126  +
          127  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          128  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          129  +</DD></DL>
          130  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          131  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          132  +</DT><DD>
          133  +
          134  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          135  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          136  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          137  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          138  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          139  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          140  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          141  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          142  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          143  +
          144  +</DD></DL>
          145  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ScrollView.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>ScrollView</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>ScrollView</B>
            6  + - Display the visible area of a scrolled window
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrollView</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TR>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +</TABLE></DD>
           24  +</DL>
           25  +<DL>
           26  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           27  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           28  +<TR>
           29  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-fill">-fill</A></TR>
           30  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
           31  +</TR>
           32  +<TR>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
           35  +</TR>
           36  +<TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-window">-window</A></TR>
           38  +</TABLE></DD>
           39  +</DL>
           40  +<DL>
           41  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           42  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           43  + <I>option</I>
           44  +</DD>
           45  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           46  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           47  +</DD>
           48  +</DL>
           49  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           50  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           51  +<P>
           52  +
           53  +ScrollView displays the visible area of a scrolled window within
           54  +its scroll region.
           55  +
           56  +</P>
           57  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           58  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           59  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT>
           60  +<DD>
           61  +
           62  +Specifies the fill color of the rectangle.
           63  +
           64  +</DD>
           65  +</DL>
           66  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-foreground"><B>-foreground</B></A></DT>
           67  +<DD>
           68  +
           69  +Specifies the color of the border of the rectangle.
           70  +
           71  +</DD>
           72  +</DL>
           73  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
           74  +<DD>
           75  +
           76  +Specifies the desired height for the ScrollView.
           77  +</DD>
           78  +</DL>
           79  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
           80  +<DD>
           81  +
           82  +Specifies the desired width for the ScrollView.
           83  +</DD>
           84  +</DL>
           85  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT>
           86  +<DD>
           87  +
           88  +Specifies the window to view. This widget must have <B>-xscrollcommand</B> and 
           89  +<B>-yscrollcommand</B> options, and respond to <B>xview</B> and <B>yview</B> command.
           90  +In order to make ScrollView working with other scrollbar, <B>-xscrollcommand</B> and 
           91  +<B>-yscrollcommand</B> options of the widget must be set before the widget is passed to
           92  +the <B>-window</B> option of the ScrollView (for example, if the widget is handled by
           93  +a ScrolledWindow, call <B>setwidget</B> before setting <B>-window</B> option).
           94  +
           95  +</DD>
           96  +</DL>
           97  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           98  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
           99  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          100  + <I>option</I>
          101  +</DT><DD>
          102  +
          103  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          104  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          105  +</DD></DL>
          106  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          107  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          108  +</DT><DD>
          109  +
          110  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          111  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          112  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          113  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          114  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          115  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          116  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          117  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          118  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          119  +
          120  +</DD></DL>
          121  +<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR>
          122  +
          123  +<DL><DT>If mouse button 1 is pressed and dragged over the ScrollView, the top left corner of
          124  +the visible area of the scrolled window is moved proportionally to the mouse displacement.
          125  +</DT></DL>
          126  +<DL><DT>If mouse button 3 is pressed over the ScrollView, the top left corner of the visible
          127  +area is proportionally set to this point.
          128  +</DT></DL>
          129  +
          130  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ScrollableFrame.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>ScrollableFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>ScrollableFrame</B>
            6  + - Scrollable frame containing widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrollableFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD></TR>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD></TR>
           21  +</TABLE></DD>
           22  +<BR>
           23  +Themed widget (<B>Widget::theme true</B>): Options <B>-background</B> and <B>-bg</B> are not available.
           24  +Modify style <B>TFrame</B> property <B>-background</B> instead.
           25  +</DL>
           26  +<DL>
           27  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           28  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           29  +<TR>
           30  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-areaheight">-areaheight</A></TR>
           31  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-areawidth">-areawidth</A></TR>
           32  +</TR>
           33  +<TR>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-constrainedheight">-constrainedheight</A></TR>
           35  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-constrainedwidth">-constrainedwidth</A></TR>
           36  +</TR>
           37  +<TR>
           38  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
           39  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
           40  +</TR>
           41  +<TR>
           42  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-xscrollincrement">-xscrollincrement</A></TR>
           43  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-yscrollincrement">-yscrollincrement</A></TR>
           44  +</TR>
           45  +</TABLE></DD>
           46  +</DL>
           47  +<DL>
           48  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           49  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           50  + <I>option</I>
           51  +</DD>
           52  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           53  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           54  +</DD>
           55  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
           56  +</DD>
           57  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
           58  + <I>widget</I>
           59  + ?<I>vert</I>?
           60  + ?<I>horz</I>?
           61  +</DD>
           62  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A>
           63  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
           64  +</DD>
           65  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A>
           66  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
           67  +</DD>
           68  +</DL>
           69  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           70  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           71  +<P>
           72  +
           73  +ScrollableFrame widget containing widget.
           74  +
           75  +</P>
           76  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           77  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           78  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-areaheight"><B>-areaheight</B></A></DT>
           79  +<DD>
           80  +
           81  +Specifies the height for the scrollable area. If zero, then the height
           82  +of the scrollable area is made just large enough to hold all its children.
           83  +</DD>
           84  +</DL>
           85  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-areawidth"><B>-areawidth</B></A></DT>
           86  +<DD>
           87  +
           88  +Specifies the width for the scrollable area. If zero, then the width
           89  +of the scrollable area window is made just large enough to hold all its children.
           90  +</DD>
           91  +</DL>
           92  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-constrainedheight"><B>-constrainedheight</B></A></DT>
           93  +<DD>
           94  +
           95  +Specifies whether or not the scrollable area should have the same height of the
           96  +scrolled window. If true, vertical scrollbar is not needed.
           97  +
           98  +</DD>
           99  +</DL>
          100  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-constrainedwidth"><B>-constrainedwidth</B></A></DT>
          101  +<DD>
          102  +
          103  +Specifies whether or not the scrollable area should have the same width of the
          104  +scrolled window. If true, horizontal scrollbar is not needed.
          105  +
          106  +</DD>
          107  +</DL>
          108  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
          109  +<DD>
          110  +
          111  +Specifies the desired height for the window in pixels.
          112  +
          113  +</DD>
          114  +</DL>
          115  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
          116  +<DD>
          117  +
          118  +Specifies the desired width for the window in pixels.
          119  +
          120  +</DD>
          121  +</DL>
          122  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-xscrollincrement"><B>-xscrollincrement</B></A></DT>
          123  +<DD>
          124  +
          125  +See <B>xscrollincrement</B> option of <B>canvas</B> widget.
          126  +
          127  +</DD>
          128  +</DL>
          129  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-yscrollincrement"><B>-yscrollincrement</B></A></DT>
          130  +<DD>
          131  +
          132  +See <B>yscrollincrement</B> option of <B>canvas</B> widget.
          133  +
          134  +</DD>
          135  +</DL>
          136  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          137  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          138  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          139  + <I>option</I>
          140  +</DT><DD>
          141  +
          142  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          143  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          144  +</DD></DL>
          145  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          146  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          147  +</DT><DD>
          148  +
          149  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          150  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          151  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          152  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          153  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          154  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          155  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          156  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          157  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          158  +
          159  +</DD></DL>
          160  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
          161  +</DT><DD>
          162  +
          163  +Return the pathname of the scrolled frame where widget should be created.
          164  +
          165  +</DD></DL>
          166  +<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
          167  + <I>widget</I>
          168  + ?<I>vert</I>?
          169  + ?<I>horz</I>?
          170  +</DT><DD>
          171  +
          172  +Arrange scrollable area to make <I>widget</I> visible in the window.
          173  +<I>vert</I> and <I>horz</I> specify which part of <I>widget</I> must be preferably
          174  +visible, in case where <I>widget</I> is too tall or too large to be entirely visible.
          175  +<I>vert</I> must be <B>top</B> (the default) or <B>bottom</B>,
          176  +and <I>horz</I> must be <B>left</B> (the default) or <B>right</B>.
          177  +If <I>vert</I> or <I>horz</I> is not a valid value, area is not scrolled in this direction.
          178  +
          179  +</DD></DL>
          180  +<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A>
          181  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          182  +</DT><DD>
          183  +
          184  +Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
          185  +
          186  +</DD></DL>
          187  +<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A>
          188  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          189  +</DT><DD>
          190  +
          191  +Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
          192  +
          193  +</DD></DL>
          194  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ScrolledWindow.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>ScrolledWindow</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>ScrolledWindow</B>
            6  + - Generic scrolled widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrolledWindow</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
           15  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           16  +<TR>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           18  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           19  +</TR>
           20  +<TR>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
           22  +</TABLE></DD>
           23  +<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
           24  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           25  +<TR>
           26  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           27  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
           28  +</TR>
           29  +<TR>
           30  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;(<B>-bg</B> has no effect)</TD>
           31  +</TR>
           32  +</TABLE></DD>
           33  +</DL>
           34  +<DL>
           35  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           36  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           37  +<TR>
           38  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-auto">-auto</A></TR>
           39  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
           40  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-managed">-managed</A></TR>
           41  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-scrollbar">-scrollbar</A></TR>
           42  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-sides">-sides</A></TR>
           43  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-size">-size</A></TR>
           44  +</TR>
           45  +</TABLE></DD>
           46  +</DL>
           47  +<DL>
           48  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           49  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           50  + <I>option</I>
           51  +</DD>
           52  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           53  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           54  +</DD>
           55  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
           56  +</DD>
           57  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setwidget"><B>setwidget</B></A>
           58  + <I>widget</I>
           59  +</DD>
           60  +</DL>
           61  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           62  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           63  +<P>
           64  +
           65  +ScrolledWindow enables user to create easily a widget with its scrollbar.
           66  +Scrollbars are created by ScrolledWindow and scroll commands are automatically associated to
           67  +a scrollable widget with <B>ScrolledWindow::setwidget</B>.
           68  +</P>
           69  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           70  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           71  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-auto"><B>-auto</B></A></DT>
           72  +<DD>
           73  +
           74  +Specifies the desired auto managed scrollbar:
           75  +<LI><B>none</B> means scrollbar are always drawn
           76  +<LI><B>horizontal</B> means horizontal scrollbar is drawn as needed
           77  +<LI><B>vertical</B> means vertical scrollbar is drawn as needed
           78  +<LI><B>both</B> means horizontal and vertical scrollbars are drawn as needed (default value)
           79  +</DD>
           80  +</DL>
           81  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad (read-only)</B></A></DT>
           82  +<DD>
           83  +
           84  +Padding in pixels between client widget and scrollbars.
           85  +Default value: <B>1</B>.
           86  +</DD>
           87  +</DL>
           88  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-managed"><B>-managed (read-only)</B></A></DT>
           89  +<DD>
           90  +
           91  +If true, scrollbar are managed during creation, so their size are included in the requested size of the
           92  +ScrolledWindow. If false, they are not.
           93  +Default value: <B>true</B>.
           94  +</DD>
           95  +</DL>
           96  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-scrollbar"><B>-scrollbar</B></A></DT>
           97  +<DD>
           98  +
           99  +Specifies the desired scrollbar: <B>none</B>, <B>horizontal</B>, <B>vertical</B>
          100  +or <B>both</B> (default value).
          101  +</DD>
          102  +</DL>
          103  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-sides"><B>-sides (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          104  +<DD>
          105  +
          106  +Side of the scrollbars.
          107  +Possible values are: <B>ne</B>, <B>en</B>, <B>nw</B>, <B>wn</B>, <B>se</B> (default value), <B>es</B>, <B>sw</B>, <B>ws</B>.
          108  +</DD>
          109  +</DL>
          110  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-size"><B>-size (read-only)</B></A></DT>
          111  +<DD>
          112  +
          113  +Size of the scrollbars in pixels.
          114  +Use </B>0</B> for standard size (default value).<BR>
          115  +This option has no effect if widget is <I>themed</I>.
          116  +</DD>
          117  +</DL>
          118  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          119  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          120  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          121  + <I>option</I>
          122  +</DT><DD>
          123  +
          124  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          125  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          126  +</DD></DL>
          127  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          128  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          129  +</DT><DD>
          130  +
          131  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          132  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          133  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          134  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          135  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          136  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          137  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          138  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          139  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          140  +
          141  +</DD></DL>
          142  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
          143  +</DT><DD>
          144  +
          145  +Return the pathname of the frame where the scrolled widget should be created. This command
          146  +is no longer needed. You can directly create the scrolled widget as the child
          147  +of <I>pathName</I>.
          148  +</DD></DL>
          149  +<DL><DT><A NAME="setwidget"><I>pathName</I> <B>setwidget</B></A>
          150  + <I>widget</I>
          151  +</DT><DD>
          152  +
          153  +Associate <I>widget</I> to the the scrollbars. <I>widget</I> becomes
          154  +managed by the ScrolledWindow.  The user should not attempt to manage
          155  +<I>widget</I> until it is no longer managed by the ScrolledWindow.
          156  +<I>widget</I> must be a scrollable widget, i.e. have the options
          157  +<B>xscrollcommand</B>/<B>yscrollcommand</B> and the command <B>xview</B>/<B>yview</B>,
          158  +such as canvas or text.
          159  +</DD></DL>
          160  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/SelectColor.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>SelectColor</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>SelectColor</B>
            6  + - Color selection widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SelectColor</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-color">-color</A></td>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></td>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-placement">-placement</A></td>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></td>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></td>
           25  +</TR>
           26  +</TABLE></DD>
           27  +</DL>
           28  +<DL>
           29  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           30  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           31  + <I>option</I>
           32  +</DD>
           33  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           34  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           35  +</DD>
           36  +<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#dialog"><B>dialog</B></A>
           37  + <I>pathName</I>
           38  + <I>?option value ...?</I>
           39  +</DD>
           40  +<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#menu"><B>menu</B></A>
           41  + <I>pathName</I>
           42  + <I>placement</I>
           43  + <I>?option value ...?</I>
           44  +</DD>
           45  +<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#setcolor"><B>setcolor</B></A>
           46  + <I>index</I>
           47  + <I>color</I>
           48  +</DD>
           49  +</DL>
           50  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           51  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           52  +<P>
           53  +
           54  +SelectColor provides a simple way to select color. It can be displayed
           55  +as a dialog box or as a menubutton.
           56  +
           57  +</P>
           58  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           59  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           60  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-color"><B>-color</B></A></DT>
           61  +<DD>
           62  +
           63  +Specifies the color value of the widget.
           64  +
           65  +</DD>
           66  +</DL>
           67  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT>
           68  +<DD>
           69  +
           70  +Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is centered in its parent. If empty, it is centered in
           71  +root window.
           72  +</DD>
           73  +</DL>
           74  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-placement"><B>-placement</B></A></DT>
           75  +<DD>
           76  +
           77  +Where to place the <i>popup</i> color dialog when displaying it.
           78  +Must be any of: <b>at</b>, <b>center</b>, <b>left</b>,
           79  +<b>right</b>, <b>above</b>, or <b>below</b>.  If <i>-parent</i> is specified,
           80  +placement will be in relation to the parent widget.
           81  +</DD>
           82  +</DL>
           83  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
           84  +<DD>
           85  +
           86  +Title of the Dialog toplevel.
           87  +
           88  +</DD>
           89  +</DL>
           90  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type (read-only)</B></A></DT>
           91  +<DD>
           92  +
           93  +Specifies the type of the SelectColor widget. Must be <B>dialog</B> or
           94  +<B>popup</B>.  <BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>dialog</I>,
           95  +SelectColor::<B>create</B> directly creates the dialog, displays it and
           96  +return an empty string if cancel button is pressed or if dialog is destroyed,
           97  +and the selected color if ok button is pressed. In all cases, dialog is
           98  +destroyed.  <BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>popup</I>,
           99  +SelectColor::<B>create</B> creates a small, popup dialog with a small set of
          100  +predefined colors and a button to activate a full color dialog.
          101  +
          102  +</DD>
          103  +</DL>
          104  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          105  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          106  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          107  + <I>option</I>
          108  +</DT><DD>
          109  +
          110  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          111  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          112  +</DD></DL>
          113  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          114  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          115  +</DT><DD>
          116  +
          117  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          118  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          119  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          120  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          121  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          122  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          123  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          124  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          125  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          126  +
          127  +</DD></DL>
          128  +<DL><DT><A NAME="dialog">SelectColor::<B>dialog</B></A>
          129  + <I>pathName</I>
          130  + <I>?option value ...?</I>
          131  +</DT><DD>
          132  +
          133  +Creates a dialog for the user to select a custom color.
          134  +
          135  +</DD></DL>
          136  +
          137  +<DL><DT><A NAME="dialog">SelectColor::<B>menu</B></A>
          138  + <I>pathName</I>
          139  + <I>placement</I>
          140  + <I>?option value ...?</I>
          141  +</DT><DD>
          142  +
          143  +Creates a small, popup dialog for the user to select from a predefined list
          144  +of colors with an additional button to display a full color dialog.
          145  +
          146  +<p>
          147  +<i>placement</i> can be any of <b>at</b>, <b>center</b>, <b>left</b>,
          148  +<b>right</b>, <b>above</b>, or <b>below</b>.  If <i>-parent</i> is specified,
          149  +placement will be in relation to the parent widget.
          150  +</p>
          151  +
          152  +</DD></DL>
          153  +
          154  +</DD></DL>
          155  +<DL><DT><A NAME="setcolor">SelectColor::<B>setcolor</B></A>
          156  + <I>index</I>
          157  + <I>color</I>
          158  +</DT><DD>
          159  +
          160  +Set the value of user predefined color at index <I>index</I> to <I>color</I>.
          161  +<I>index</I> must be between 0 and 10.
          162  +
          163  +</DD></DL>
          164  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/SelectFont.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>SelectFont</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>SelectFont</B>
            6  + - Font selection widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SelectFont</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +</TABLE></DD>
           20  +</DL>
           21  +<DL>
           22  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           23  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           24  +<TR>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
           26  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-initialcolor">-initialcolor</A></TR>
           27  +</TR>
           28  +<TR>
           29  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-nosizes">-nosizes</A></TR>
           30  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></TR>
           31  +</TR>
           32  +<TR>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-sampletext">-sampletext</A></TR>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TR>
           35  +</TR>
           36  +<TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
           38  +</TABLE></DD>
           39  +</DL>
           40  +<DL>
           41  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           42  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           43  + <I>option</I>
           44  +</DD>
           45  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           46  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           47  +</DD>
           48  +<DD>SelectFont::<A HREF="#loadfont"><B>loadfont</B></A>
           49  +</DD>
           50  +</DL>
           51  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           52  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           53  +<P>
           54  +
           55  +SelectFont provides a simple way to choose font. It can be displayed
           56  +as a dialog box or as a toolbar.
           57  +<BR>Textual items in Dialog box uses <B>-name</B> options so they
           58  +can be translated to any language. Symbolic name used are
           59  +<B>ok</B>, <B>cancel</B>, <B>font</B>, <B>size</B>, <B>style</B>,
           60  +<B>bold</B>, <B>italic</B>, <B>underline</B> and <B>overstrike</B>.
           61  +
           62  +</P>
           63  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           64  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           65  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
           66  +<DD>
           67  +
           68  +Specifies a command to call when user select a new font when SelectFont <B>type</B>
           69  +option is <I>toolbar</I>.
           70  +
           71  +</DD>
           72  +</DL>
           73  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-initialcolor"><B>-initialcolor</B></A></DT>
           74  +<DD>
           75  +
           76  +If specified, add an additional button that lets the user pick a
           77  +color.  This option is ignored if <B>type</B> is <I>toolbar</I>.
           78  +</DD>
           79  +</DL>
           80  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-nosizes"><B>-nosizes</B></A></DT>
           81  +<DD>
           82  +
           83  +If true, don't show the listbox containing valid font sizes.  This
           84  +option is ignored if <B>type</B> is <I>toolbar</I>.
           85  +</DD>
           86  +</DL>
           87  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT>
           88  +<DD>
           89  +
           90  +Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is centered in its parent. If empty, it is centered in
           91  +root window.
           92  +</DD>
           93  +</DL>
           94  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-sampletext"><B>-sampletext</B></A></DT>
           95  +<DD>
           96  +
           97  +Specifies the text displayed in the preview area.
           98  +
           99  +</DD>
          100  +</DL>
          101  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
          102  +<DD>
          103  +
          104  +Title of the Dialog toplevel.
          105  +
          106  +</DD>
          107  +</DL>
          108  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
          109  +<DD>
          110  +
          111  +Specifies the type of the SelectFont widget. Must be <B>dialog</B> or <B>toolbar</B>.
          112  +<BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>dialog</I>, SelectFont::<B>create</B> directly creates the 
          113  +dialog, displays it and return an empty string if cancel button is
          114  +pressed or if dialog is destroyed, and the selected font (and color
          115  +if <B>initialcolor</B>) if ok button is pressed. In all cases, dialog
          116  +is destroyed.
          117  +<BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>toolbar</I>, SelectFont::<B>create</B> returns the pathname
          118  +of the widget created.
          119  +
          120  +</DD>
          121  +</DL>
          122  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          123  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          124  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          125  + <I>option</I>
          126  +</DT><DD>
          127  +
          128  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          129  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          130  +</DD></DL>
          131  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          132  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          133  +</DT><DD>
          134  +
          135  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          136  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          137  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          138  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          139  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          140  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          141  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          142  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          143  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          144  +
          145  +</DD></DL>
          146  +<DL><DT><A NAME="loadfont">SelectFont::<B>loadfont</B></A>
          147  +</DT><DD>
          148  +
          149  +Load the font available in the system.
          150  +
          151  +</DD></DL>
          152  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Separator.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>Separator</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>Separator</B>
            6  + - 3D separator widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Separator</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +</TABLE></DD>
           20  +</DL>
           21  +<DL>
           22  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           23  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           24  +<TR>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-relief">-relief</A></TR>
           26  +</TABLE></DD>
           27  +</DL>
           28  +<DL>
           29  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           30  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           31  + <I>option</I>
           32  +</DD>
           33  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           34  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           35  +</DD>
           36  +</DL>
           37  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           38  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           39  +<P>
           40  +
           41  +Separator is a widget that display an horizontal or vertical 3-D line.
           42  +
           43  +</P>
           44  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           45  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           46  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-relief"><B>-relief</B></A></DT>
           47  +<DD>
           48  +
           49  +Specifies the relief of the Separator. Must be <B>groove</B> (the default) or <B>ridge</B>.
           50  +
           51  +</DD>
           52  +</DL>
           53  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           54  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
           55  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
           56  + <I>option</I>
           57  +</DT><DD>
           58  +
           59  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
           60  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
           61  +</DD></DL>
           62  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
           63  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           64  +</DT><DD>
           65  +
           66  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
           67  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
           68  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
           69  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
           70  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
           71  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
           72  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
           73  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
           74  +Read-only options are not be modified.
           75  +
           76  +</DD></DL>
           77  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/SpinBox.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>SpinBox</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>SpinBox</B>
            6  + - SpinBox widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SpinBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatdelay</TD>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatinterval</TD>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
           26  +</TR>
           27  +</TABLE></DD>
           28  +</DL>
           29  +<DL>
           30  +<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT>
           31  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
           32  +<TR>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-command</TD>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
           35  +</TR>
           36  +<TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragenabled</TD>
           38  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragendcmd</TD>
           39  +</TR>
           40  +<TR>
           41  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragevent</TD>
           42  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-draginitcmd</TD>
           43  +</TR>
           44  +<TR>
           45  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragtype</TD>
           46  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropcmd</TD>
           47  +</TR>
           48  +<TR>
           49  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropenabled</TD>
           50  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropovercmd</TD>
           51  +</TR>
           52  +<TR>
           53  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-droptypes</TD>
           54  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-editable</TD>
           55  +</TR>
           56  +<TR>
           57  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD>
           58  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
           59  +</TR>
           60  +<TR>
           61  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
           62  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
           63  +</TR>
           64  +<TR>
           65  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
           66  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
           67  +</TR>
           68  +<TR>
           69  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
           70  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
           71  +</TR>
           72  +<TR>
           73  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
           74  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
           75  +</TR>
           76  +<TR>
           77  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
           78  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
           79  +</TR>
           80  +<TR>
           81  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
           82  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
           83  +</TR>
           84  +<TR>
           85  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
           86  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
           87  +</TR>
           88  +<TR>
           89  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
           90  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
           91  +</TR>
           92  +<TR>
           93  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
           94  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-show</TD>
           95  +</TR>
           96  +<TR>
           97  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
           98  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-takefocus</TD>
           99  +</TR>
          100  +<TR>
          101  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
          102  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
          103  +</TR>
          104  +<TR>
          105  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
          106  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-xscrollcommand</TD>
          107  +</TR>
          108  +</TABLE></DD>
          109  +</DL>
          110  +<DL>
          111  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
          112  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
          113  +<TR>
          114  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-modifycmd">-modifycmd</A></TR>
          115  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-range">-range</A></TR>
          116  +</TR>
          117  +<TR>
          118  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-values">-values</A></TR>
          119  +</TABLE></DD>
          120  +</DL>
          121  +<DL>
          122  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
          123  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A>
          124  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          125  +</DD>
          126  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
          127  + <I>option</I>
          128  +</DD>
          129  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
          130  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          131  +</DD>
          132  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getvalue"><B>getvalue</B></A>
          133  +</DD>
          134  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setvalue"><B>setvalue</B></A>
          135  + <I>index</I>
          136  +</DD>
          137  +</DL>
          138  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
          139  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
          140  +<P>
          141  +
          142  +SpinBox widget enables the user to select a value among a list given by the <B>values</B>
          143  +option or a set of values defined by a mininum, a maximum and an increment.
          144  +Notice that <B>range</B> option defines a list of values, so <B>getvalue</B> and
          145  +<B>setvalue</B> work with both values and range.
          146  +
          147  +</P>
          148  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          149  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
          150  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-modifycmd"><B>-modifycmd</B></A></DT>
          151  +<DD>
          152  +
          153  +Specifies a Tcl command called when the user modify the value of the SpinBox.
          154  +</DD>
          155  +</DL>
          156  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-range"><B>-range</B></A></DT>
          157  +<DD>
          158  +
          159  +Specifies a list of three intergers (or real) describing the minimum, maximum and increment
          160  +of the SpinBox.
          161  +</DD>
          162  +</DL>
          163  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-values"><B>-values</B></A></DT>
          164  +<DD>
          165  +
          166  +Specifies the values accepted by the SpinBox. This option takes precedence over
          167  +<B>range</B> option.
          168  +</DD>
          169  +</DL>
          170  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          171  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          172  +<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A>
          173  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          174  +</DT><DD>
          175  +
          176  +Set bindings on the entry widget.
          177  +
          178  +</DD></DL>
          179  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          180  + <I>option</I>
          181  +</DT><DD>
          182  +
          183  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          184  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          185  +</DD></DL>
          186  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          187  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          188  +</DT><DD>
          189  +
          190  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
          191  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
          192  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
          193  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
          194  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
          195  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
          196  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          197  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          198  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          199  +
          200  +</DD></DL>
          201  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>getvalue</B></A>
          202  +</DT><DD>
          203  +
          204  +Returns the index of the current text of the SpinBox in the list of values,
          205  +or -1 if it doesn't match any value.
          206  +
          207  +</DD></DL>
          208  +<DL><DT><A NAME="setvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>setvalue</B></A>
          209  + <I>index</I>
          210  +</DT><DD>
          211  +
          212  +Set the text of the SpinBox to the value indicated by <I>index</I> in the list of values.
          213  +<I>index</I> may be specified in any of the following forms:
          214  +<P>
          215  +<DL COMPACT>
          216  +<DT>
          217  +<B>last</B>
          218  +<DD>
          219  +Specifies the last element of the list of values.
          220  +<DT><B>first</B>
          221  +<DD>
          222  +Specifies the first element of the list of values.
          223  +<DT>
          224  +<B>next</B>
          225  +<DD>
          226  +Specifies the element following the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
          227  +of values.
          228  +<DT><B>previous</B>
          229  +<DD>
          230  +Specifies the element preceding the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
          231  +of values.
          232  +<DT>
          233  +@<I>number</I>
          234  +<DD>
          235  +Specifies the integer index in the list of values.
          236  +</DL>
          237  +
          238  +</DD></DL>
          239  +<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR>
          240  +
          241  +When Entry of the SpinBox has the input focus, it has the following bindings, in addition
          242  +to the default Entry bindings:
          243  +<UL>
          244  +<LI>Page up set the value of the SpinBox to the last value.
          245  +<LI>Page down set the value of the SpinBox to the first value.
          246  +<LI>Arrow up set the value of the SpinBox to the next value.
          247  +<LI>Arrow down set the value of the SpinBox to the previous value.
          248  +</UL>
          249  +
          250  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/StatusBar.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>StatusBar</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>StatusBar</B>
            6  + - status bar widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>StatusBar</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR>
           26  +</TR>
           27  +</TABLE></DD>
           28  +</DL>
           29  +<DL>
           30  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           31  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           32  +<TR>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-showresize">-showresize</A></TR>
           35  +</TR>
           36  +<TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
           38  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-pad">-pad</A></TR>
           39  +</TR>
           40  +<TR>
           41  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A>
           42  +</TR>
           43  +</TABLE></DD>
           44  +</DL>
           45  +<DL>
           46  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           47  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           48  + <I>option</I>
           49  +</DD>
           50  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           51  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           52  +</DD>
           53  +</DL>
           54  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           55  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           56  +
           57  +<P>
           58  +StatusBar widget is a simple container widget with a corner resize control,
           59  +meant to be placed at the bottom of a toplevel dialog.
           60  +</P>
           61  +
           62  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           63  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           64  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
           65  +<DD>
           66  +Specifies the desired height for the widget.
           67  +</DD>
           68  +</DL>
           69  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-showresize"><B>-showresize</B></A></DT>
           70  +<DD>
           71  +Specifies whether to show the corner resize control.
           72  +</DD>
           73  +</DL>
           74  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-pad"><B>-pad</B></A></DT>
           75  +<DD>
           76  +The spacing to place around the status bar.
           77  +</DD>
           78  +</DL>
           79  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT>
           80  +<DD>
           81  +The spacing to place around individual status bar items.
           82  +</DD>
           83  +</DL>
           84  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
           85  +<DD>
           86  +Specifies the desired width for the widget.
           87  +</DD>
           88  +</DL>
           89  +
           90  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           91  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
           92  +<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> <B>widget</B>
           93  + ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           94  +</DT><DD>
           95  +Add a widget to the status bar. Possible options are:
           96  +<DL>
           97  +<DT><B>-weight</B></DT>
           98  +<DD>Weighting of this item for resizing (passed to <B>grid</B>).</DD>
           99  +<DT><B>-separator</B></DT>
          100  +<DD>Whether to use a separator for this item.</DD>
          101  +<DT><B>-sticky</B></DT>
          102  +<DD>Passed on to grid.</DD>
          103  +<DT><B>-pad</B></DT>
          104  +<DD>Override of the widget's <B>-ipad</B> option for this item.</DD>
          105  +</DL>
          106  +</DD>
          107  +</DL>
          108  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          109  + <I>option</I>
          110  +</DT><DD>
          111  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          112  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          113  +</DD>
          114  +</DL>
          115  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          116  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          117  +</DT><DD>
          118  +
          119  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no
          120  +<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
          121  +options for <I>pathName</I>.  If <I>option</I> is specified with no
          122  +<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named
          123  +<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of
          124  +the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more
          125  +<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the
          126  +given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command
          127  +returns an empty string.
          128  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          129  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          130  +</DD>
          131  +</DL>
          132  +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
          133  +<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...?
          134  +</DT><DD>
          135  +Delete a widget and associated state from the status bar.</DD>
          136  +</DL>
          137  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
          138  +</DT><DD>
          139  +Get the frame widget for the status bar in which status bar items should be
          140  +created.</DD>
          141  +</DD>
          142  +</DL>
          143  +<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A>
          144  +</DT><DD>List of items in the status bar.</DD>
          145  +<DL>
          146  +
          147  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/TitleFrame.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>TitleFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>TitleFrame</B>
            6  + - Frame with a title
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>TitleFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
           21  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
           25  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
           26  +</TR>
           27  +</TABLE></DD>
           28  +</DL>
           29  +<DL>
           30  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           31  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           32  +<TR>
           33  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-baseline">-baseline</A></TR>
           34  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
           35  +</TR>
           36  +<TR>
           37  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR>
           38  +</TABLE></DD>
           39  +</DL>
           40  +<DL>
           41  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           42  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           43  + <I>option</I>
           44  +</DD>
           45  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           46  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           47  +</DD>
           48  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
           49  +</DD>
           50  +</DL>
           51  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
           52  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
           53  +<P>
           54  +
           55  +TitleFrame enables user to create a frame with a title like XmFrame Motif widget.
           56  +</P>
           57  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           58  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
           59  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-baseline"><B>-baseline</B></A></DT>
           60  +<DD>
           61  +
           62  +Specifies the vertical alignment of the title: <B>top</B>, <B>center</B> or <B>bottom</B>.
           63  +</DD>
           64  +</DL>
           65  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT>
           66  +<DD>
           67  +
           68  +Specifies a pad between the border of the frame and the user frame.
           69  +The value is in screen units.
           70  +</DD>
           71  +</DL>
           72  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side</B></A></DT>
           73  +<DD>
           74  +
           75  +Specifies the horizontal alignment of the title: <B>left</B>, <B>center</B> or <B>right</B>.
           76  +</DD>
           77  +</DL>
           78  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
           79  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
           80  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
           81  + <I>option</I>
           82  +</DT><DD>
           83  +
           84  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
           85  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
           86  +</DD></DL>
           87  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
           88  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
           89  +</DT><DD>
           90  +
           91  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
           92  +returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
           93  +If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
           94  +describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
           95  +sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
           96  +more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
           97  +option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
           98  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
           99  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          100  +
          101  +</DD></DL>
          102  +<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
          103  +</DT><DD>
          104  +
          105  +Return the frame where the user can create any other widget.
          106  +</DD></DL>
          107  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Tree.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>Tree</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            5  +<DD><B>Tree</B>
            6  + - Tree widget
            7  +</DD></DL>
            8  +<DL>
            9  +<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
           10  +<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Tree</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
           11  +</DL>
           12  +<DL>
           13  +<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
           14  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           15  +<TR>
           16  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
           17  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
           18  +</TR>
           19  +<TR>
           20  +    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
           21  +    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
           22  +</TR>
           23  +<TR>
           24  +    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
           25  +    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
           26  +</TR>
           27  +<TR>
           28  +    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
           29  +    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD>
           30  +</TR>
           31  +<TR>
           32  +    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD>
           33  +    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
           34  +</TR>
           35  +<TR>
           36  +    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
           37  +    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD>
           38  +</TR>
           39  +</TABLE></DD>
           40  +</DL>
           41  +<DL>
           42  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
           43  +<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
           44  +<TR>
           45  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-closecmd">-closecmd</A></TD>
           46  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossfill">-crossfill</A></TD>
           47  +<TR>
           48  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossclosebitmap">-crossclosebitmap</A></TD>
           49  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crosscloseimage">-crosscloseimage</A></TD>
           50  +</TR>
           51  +<TR>
           52  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossopenbitmap">-crossopenbitmap</A></TD>
           53  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossopenimage">-crossopenimage</A></TD>
           54  +</TR>
           55  +<TR>
           56  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltax">-deltax</A></TD>
           57  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltay">-deltay</A></TD>
           58  +</TR>
           59  +<TR>
           60  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD>
           61  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD>
           62  +</TR>
           63  +<TR>
           64  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD>
           65  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD>
           66  +</TR>
           67  +<TR>
           68  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD>
           69  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD>
           70  +</TR>
           71  +<TR>
           72  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD>
           73  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD>
           74  +</TR>
           75  +<TR>
           76  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovermode">-dropovermode</A></TD>
           77  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD>
           78  +</TR>
           79  +<TR>
           80  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
           81  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-linesfill">-linesfill</A></TD>
           82  +</TR>
           83  +<TR>
           84  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-linestipple">-linestipple</A></TD>
           85  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-opencmd">-opencmd</A></TD>
           86  +</TR>
           87  +<TR>
           88  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD>
           89  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-redraw">-redraw</A></TD>
           90  +</TR>
           91  +<TR>
           92  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectcommand">-selectcommand</A></TD>
           93  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectfill">-selectfill</A></TD>
           94  +</TR>
           95  +<TR>
           96  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-showlines">-showlines</A></TD>
           97  +<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
           98  +</TR>
           99  +</TABLE></DD>
          100  +</DL>
          101  +
          102  +<DL>
          103  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
          104  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindArea"><B>bindArea</B></A>
          105  + <I>event</I>
          106  + <I>script</I>
          107  +</DD>
          108  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindImage"><B>bindImage</B></A>
          109  + <I>event</I>
          110  + <I>script</I>
          111  +</DD>
          112  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindText"><B>bindText</B></A>
          113  + <I>event</I>
          114  + <I>script</I>
          115  +</DD>
          116  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
          117  + <I>option</I>
          118  +</DD>
          119  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#closetree"><B>closetree</B></A>
          120  + <I>node</I>
          121  +</DD>
          122  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
          123  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          124  +</DD>
          125  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
          126  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          127  +</DD>
          128  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#edit"><B>edit</B></A>
          129  + <I>node</I>
          130  + <I>text</I>
          131  + ?<I>verifycmd</I>?
          132  + ?<I>clickres</I>?
          133  + ?<I>select</I>?
          134  +</DD>
          135  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#exists"><B>exists</B></A>
          136  + <I>node</I>
          137  +</DD>
          138  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#find"><B>find</B></A>
          139  + <I>findinfo</I>
          140  + ?<I>confine</I>?
          141  +</DD>
          142  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
          143  + <I>node</I>
          144  +</DD>
          145  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
          146  + <I>index</I>
          147  + <I>parent</I>
          148  + <I>node</I>
          149  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
          150  +</DD>
          151  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
          152  + <I>node</I>
          153  + <I>option</I>
          154  +</DD>
          155  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
          156  + <I>node</I>
          157  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          158  +</DD>
          159  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#line"><B>line</B></A>
          160  + <I>node</I>
          161  +</DD>
          162  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A>
          163  + <I>parent</I>
          164  + <I>node</I>
          165  + <I>index</I>
          166  +</DD>
          167  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#nodes"><B>nodes</B></A>
          168  + <I>node</I>
          169  + ?<I>first</I>?
          170  + ?<I>last</I>?
          171  +</DD>
          172  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#opentree"><B>opentree</B></A>
          173  + <I>node</I>
          174  +</DD>
          175  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#parent"><B>parent</B></A>
          176  + <I>node</I>
          177  +</DD>
          178  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#reorder"><B>reorder</B></A>
          179  + <I>node</I>
          180  + <I>neworder</I>
          181  +</DD>
          182  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
          183  + <I>node</I>
          184  +</DD>
          185  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#selection"><B>selection</B></A>
          186  + <I>cmd</I>
          187  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          188  +</DD>
          189  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#toggle"><B>toggle</B></A>
          190  + <I>node</I>
          191  +</DD>
          192  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#visible"><B>visible</B></A>
          193  + <I>node</I>
          194  +</DD>
          195  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A>
          196  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          197  +</DD>
          198  +<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A>
          199  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          200  +</DD>
          201  +</DL>
          202  +<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
          203  +<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
          204  +<P>
          205  +
          206  +<B>Tree</B> widget uses canvas to display a hierarchical list of items (called nodes).
          207  +Each node is composed of a label with its own font and foreground attributes, and an optional
          208  +image or window. Each node can have a list of subnodes, which can be collapsed or expanded.
          209  +Each node is drawn in a single line, whose height is defined by the
          210  +<B>deltay</B> option, so they must have at most this height.
          211  +A node is uniquely identified by a string given at creation (by the
          212  +<B>insert</B> command). The node named <I>root</I> is the root of
          213  +the tree and is not drawn.
          214  +The tree structure is directly maintained by the widget.
          215  +
          216  +</P>
          217  +<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          218  +<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
          219  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-closecmd"><B>-closecmd</B></A></DT>
          220  +<DD>
          221  +
          222  +Specifies a command to be called when user close a node. The
          223  +closed node is appended to the command.
          224  +
          225  +</DD>
          226  +</DL>
          227  +
          228  +<DL>
          229  +    <DT><A NAME="-crossfill"><B>-crossfill</B></A></DT>
          230  +    <DD>
          231  +    Specifies a foreground color for the cross bitmap.
          232  +    </DD>
          233  +</DL>
          234  +
          235  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossclosebitmap"><B>-crossclosebitmap</B></A></DT>
          236  +<DD>
          237  +    Specifies a bitmap to be displayed in place of the standard cross
          238  +    when a node is closed.
          239  +</DD>
          240  +</DL>
          241  +
          242  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-crosscloseimage"><B>-crosscloseimage</B></A></DT>
          243  +<DD>
          244  +    Specifies an image to be displayed in place of the standard cross
          245  +    when a node is closed.  Overrides the -crossclosebitmap option.
          246  +</DD>
          247  +</DL>
          248  +
          249  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossopenbitmap"><B>-crossopenbitmap</B></A></DT>
          250  +<DD>
          251  +    Specifies a bitmap to be displayed in place of the standard cross
          252  +    when a node is open.
          253  +</DD>
          254  +</DL>
          255  +
          256  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossopenimage"><B>-crossopenimage</B></A></DT>
          257  +<DD>
          258  +    Specifies an image to be displayed in place of the standard cross
          259  +    when a node is open.  Overrides the -crossopenbitmap option.
          260  +</DD>
          261  +</DL>
          262  +
          263  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT>
          264  +<DD>
          265  +
          266  +Specifies horizontal indentation between a node and its children.
          267  +
          268  +</DD>
          269  +</DL>
          270  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltay"><B>-deltay</B></A></DT>
          271  +<DD>
          272  +
          273  +Specifies vertical size of the nodes.
          274  +
          275  +</DD>
          276  +</DL>
          277  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
          278  +<DD>
          279  +A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
          280  +</DD>
          281  +</DL>
          282  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
          283  +<DD>
          284  +
          285  +Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
          286  +<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
          287  +option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          288  +
          289  +</DD>
          290  +</DL>
          291  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
          292  +<DD>
          293  +
          294  +Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
          295  +Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
          296  +
          297  +</DD>
          298  +</DL>
          299  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
          300  +<DD>
          301  +
          302  +Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drag-init</I> events. This command refused the drag
          303  +if no node is designated. In other cases:
          304  +<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, it returns:
          305  +<UL>
          306  +<LI>the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>TREE_NODE</I> if empty as the data type, 
          307  +<LI><I>{copy move link}</I> as the operations, 
          308  +<LI>the node identifier as the data.
          309  +</UL>
          310  +If <B>draginitcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
          311  +<UL>
          312  +<LI>the pathname of the tree,
          313  +<LI>the identifier of the dragged node,
          314  +<LI>the toplevel created to represent dragged data.
          315  +</UL>
          316  +and must return a value conforming to <B>draginitcmd</B> option described in
          317  +<B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          318  +
          319  +</DD>
          320  +</DL>
          321  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
          322  +<DD>
          323  +
          324  +Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.
          325  +
          326  +</DD>
          327  +</DL>
          328  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
          329  +<DD>
          330  +
          331  +Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling
          332  +and extract node and position.
          333  +<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
          334  +<UL>
          335  +<LI>the pathname of the tree,
          336  +<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
          337  +<LI>a list describing where the drop occurs. It can be:
          338  +<UL>
          339  +<LI><I>{</I><B>widget</B><I>}</I>,
          340  +<LI><I>{</I><B>node</B> <I>node}</I> or
          341  +<LI><I>{</I><B>position</B> <I>node index}</I>.
          342  +</UL>
          343  +<LI>the current operation,
          344  +<LI>the data type,
          345  +<LI>the data.
          346  +</UL>
          347  +
          348  +
          349  +</DD>
          350  +</DL>
          351  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
          352  +<DD>
          353  +A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
          354  +</DD>
          355  +</DL>
          356  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
          357  +<DD>
          358  +
          359  +Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling
          360  +and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>.
          361  +If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, the command is called with the following aguments:
          362  +<UL>
          363  +<LI>the pathname of the tree,
          364  +<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
          365  +<LI>a list describing where the drop can occur, whose elements are:
          366  +<UL>
          367  +<LI>the string <I>widget</I> if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>w</I>, else empty string.
          368  +<LI>the targeted node if drag icon points a node and <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>n</I>, else empty string.
          369  +<LI>a list containing a node and the position within the children of the node where drag 
          370  +icon points to if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>p</I>, else empty string.
          371  +<LI>optionally, the preferred method if drop can occur both inside a node and between two
          372  +nodes. The value is <I>position</I> or <I>node</I>.
          373  +</UL>
          374  +<LI>the current operation,
          375  +<LI>the data type,
          376  +<LI>the data.
          377  +</UL>
          378  +The command must return a list with two elements:
          379  +<UL>
          380  +<LI>the drop status, conforming to those described in <B>dropovercmd</B> option of
          381  +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>,
          382  +<LI>the choosen method: <I>widget</I>, <I>node</I> or <I>position</I>.
          383  +</UL>
          384  +
          385  +</DD>
          386  +</DL>
          387  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovermode"><B>-dropovermode</B></A></DT>
          388  +<DD>
          389  +
          390  +Specifies the type of <I>drop-over</I> interaction. Must be a combination of
          391  +<B>w</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs everywhere on widget,
          392  +<B>p</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs between two nodes,
          393  +and <B>n</B>, which specifies that drop occurs inside nodes.
          394  +
          395  +</DD>
          396  +</DL>
          397  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
          398  +<DD>
          399  +
          400  +Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
          401  +See option <B>droptypes</B> of
          402  +<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
          403  +for more infromation.
          404  +
          405  +<BR>Default is <I>TREE_NODE</I> with operations <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B>.
          406  +
          407  +</DD>
          408  +</DL>
          409  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
          410  +<DD>
          411  +
          412  +Specifies the desired height for the tree in units of <B>deltay</B> pixels.
          413  +
          414  +</DD>
          415  +</DL>
          416  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-linesfill"><B>-linesfill</B></A></DT>
          417  +<DD>
          418  +
          419  +Specifies a foreground color for the lines between nodes.
          420  +
          421  +</DD>
          422  +</DL>
          423  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-linestipple"><B>-linestipple</B></A></DT>
          424  +<DD>
          425  +
          426  +Specifies a stipple bitmap for the lines between nodes.
          427  +
          428  +</DD>
          429  +</DL>
          430  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-opencmd"><B>-opencmd</B></A></DT>
          431  +<DD>
          432  +
          433  +Specifies a command to be called when the user opens a node. The name
          434  +of the opened node is appended to the command.
          435  +
          436  +</DD>
          437  +</DL>
          438  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
          439  +<DD>
          440  +
          441  +Specifies distance between image or window and text of the nodes.
          442  +
          443  +</DD>
          444  +</DL>
          445  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-redraw"><B>-redraw</B></A></DT>
          446  +<DD>
          447  +
          448  +Specifies wether or not the tree should be redrawn when entering idle.
          449  +Set it to false if you call <B>update</B> while modifying the tree.
          450  +
          451  +</DD>
          452  +</DL>
          453  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectcommand"><B>-selectcommand</B></A></DT>
          454  +<DD>
          455  +
          456  +Specifies a command to be called when the selection is changed. The
          457  +path of the tree widget and the selected nodes are appended to the
          458  +command.
          459  +
          460  +</DD>
          461  +</DL>
          462  +
          463  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectfill"><B>-selectfill</B></A></DT>
          464  +<DD>
          465  +    If true, the selection box will be drawn across the entire tree from
          466  +    left-to-right instead of just around the item text.
          467  +</DD>
          468  +</DL>
          469  +
          470  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-showlines"><B>-showlines</B></A></DT>
          471  +<DD>
          472  +
          473  +Specifies whether or not lines should be drawn between nodes.
          474  +
          475  +</DD>
          476  +</DL>
          477  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
          478  +<DD>
          479  +
          480  +Specifies the desired width for the tree in units of 8 pixels.
          481  +
          482  +</DD>
          483  +</DL>
          484  +<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
          485  +
          486  +<B><A NAME="nodes">NODE NAMES</A></B><BR>
          487  +<p>
          488  +Certain special characters in node names are automatically substituted
          489  +by the tree during operation.  These characters are <b>&amp; | ^ !</b>.
          490  +They are all substituted with a <b>_</b> character.  This is only to
          491  +avoid errors because the characters are special to the tree widget.
          492  +</p>
          493  +
          494  +<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
          495  +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindArea"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindArea</B></A>
          496  + <I>event</I>
          497  + <I>script</I>
          498  +</DT><DD>
          499  +
          500  +This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
          501  +sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs anywhere within the Tree area.
          502  +</DD></DL>
          503  +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindImage"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindImage</B></A>
          504  + <I>event</I>
          505  + <I>script</I>
          506  +</DT><DD>
          507  +
          508  +This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
          509  +sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the image of a node.
          510  +The node idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command and may be used to manipulate the tree (e.g. don't use <B>%W</B>).
          511  +
          512  +<P>
          513  +If <B>-selectfill</B> is given, an eventual binding of the background box by <B>bindText</B> is overwritten.
          514  +</P>
          515  +</DD></DL>
          516  +<DL><DT><A NAME="bindText"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindText</B></A>
          517  + <I>event</I>
          518  + <I>script</I>
          519  +</DT><DD>
          520  +
          521  +This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
          522  +sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the label of a node.
          523  +The node idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command and may be used to manipulate the tree (e.g. don't use <B>%W</B>).
          524  +
          525  +<P>
          526  +If <B>-selectfill</B> is given, an eventual binding of the background box by <B>bindImage</B> is overwritten.
          527  +</P>
          528  +</DD></DL>
          529  +<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
          530  + <I>option</I>
          531  +</DT><DD>
          532  +
          533  +Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
          534  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          535  +</DD></DL>
          536  +<DL><DT><A NAME="closetree"><I>pathName</I> <B>closetree</B></A> <I>node</I>
          537  +?<I>recurse</I>?
          538  +</DT><DD>
          539  +
          540  +This command close all the subtree given by <I>node</I>. Recurse
          541  +through the tree starting at <I>node</I> and set <B>open</B> option to 0
          542  +depending on <I>recurse</I>. Default value of <I>recurse</I> is <I>true</I>.
          543  +
          544  +</DD></DL>
          545  +<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
          546  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          547  +</DT><DD>
          548  +
          549  +Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is
          550  +specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for
          551  +<I>pathName</I>.  If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the
          552  +command returns a list describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will
          553  +be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no
          554  +<I>option</I> is specified). If one or more <I>option-value</I> pairs are
          555  +specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the
          556  +given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
          557  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
          558  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          559  +
          560  +</DD></DL>
          561  +<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
          562  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          563  +</DT><DD>
          564  +
          565  +Deletes all nodes (and children of them) in <I>arg</I>. <I>arg</I> can be a list
          566  +of nodes or a list of list of nodes.
          567  +To delete all the tree, do <I>$pathName delete [$pathName nodes root]</I>.
          568  +
          569  +</DD></DL>
          570  +<DL><DT><A NAME="edit"><I>pathName</I> <B>edit</B></A>
          571  + <I>node</I>
          572  + <I>text</I>
          573  + ?<I>verifycmd</I>?
          574  + ?<I>clickres</I>?
          575  + ?<I>select</I>?
          576  +</DT><DD>
          577  +
          578  +Provides a way for the user to edit in place the label of a node. This is
          579  +possible only if <I>node</I> is visible (all its parents are open).
          580  +<BR>The command takes the initial text as argument and does not modify the label of the
          581  +edited node, but returns an empty string if edition is canceled, or the typed text
          582  +if edition is accepted.
          583  +<BR>When editing, the user can cancel by pressing Escape, or accept by pressing Return.
          584  +<BR><I>clickres</I> specifies what to do if the user click outside the editable area.
          585  +If <I>clickres</I> is 0 (the default), the edition is canceled.
          586  +If <I>clickres</I> is 1, the edition is accepted.
          587  +In all other case, the edition continues.
          588  +<BR>If edition is accepted and <I>modifycmd</I> is not empty, then it is called with
          589  +the new text as argument and must return 1 to accept the new text, 0 to refuse it
          590  +and continue edition.
          591  +<BR><I>select</I> specifies wether or not the initial text should be selected. Default is 1.
          592  +
          593  +</DD></DL>
          594  +<DL><DT><A NAME="exists"><I>pathName</I> <B>exists</B></A>
          595  + <I>node</I>
          596  +</DT><DD>
          597  +
          598  +Returns whether or not <I>node</I> exists in the tree.
          599  +
          600  +</DD></DL>
          601  +<DL><DT><A NAME="find"><I>pathName</I> <B>find</B></A>
          602  + <I>findinfo</I>
          603  + ?<I>confine</I>?
          604  +</DT><DD>
          605  +
          606  +<p>
          607  +Returns the node given by the position <I>findinfo</I>.
          608  +<I>findinfo</I> can take the form of a pixel position <I>@x,y</I> or
          609  +of the line number of a currently visible Tree node.  The first line
          610  +of the Tree has the value of zero.
          611  +</p>
          612  +
          613  +<p>
          614  +If <I>confine</I> is non-empty, then confine <I>findinfo</I> to only
          615  +match pixel positions for the area consumed by Tree labels, not just
          616  +anywhere on their lines.  (<I>confine</I> has no effect if
          617  +<I>findinfo</I> is a line number.)
          618  +</p>
          619  +
          620  +</DD></DL>
          621  +<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
          622  + <I>node</I>
          623  +</DT><DD>
          624  +
          625  +Returns the position of <I>node</I> in its parent.
          626  +
          627  +</DD></DL>
          628  +<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
          629  + <I>index</I>
          630  + <I>parent</I>
          631  + <I>node</I>
          632  + ?<I>option value...</I>?
          633  +</DT><DD>
          634  +
          635  +<p>
          636  +Inserts a new node identified by <I>node</I> in the children list of
          637  +<I>parent</I> at position <I>index</I>.
          638  +</p>
          639  +
          640  +<p>
          641  +Any instance of <i>#auto</i> within the node name will be replaced by the
          642  +number of the item in the order of insertion.  The non-printable characters
          643  +\1 to \5 are reserved for internal use and should not be present in node
          644  +names.
          645  +</p>
          646  +
          647  +
          648  +<P>
          649  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-anchor"><B>-anchor</B></A></DT>
          650  +<DD>
          651  +    Specifies the anchor of the image or window of the node.  Defaults to w.
          652  +</DD>
          653  +</DL>
          654  +
          655  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-data"><B>-data</B></A></DT>
          656  +<DD>
          657  +
          658  +User data associated to the node.
          659  +
          660  +</DD>
          661  +</DL>
          662  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT>
          663  +<DD>
          664  +
          665  +Specifies the horizontal indentation of the node.  If the value is -1, the
          666  +node will be drawn with the deltax for the entire tree.
          667  +
          668  +</DD>
          669  +</DL>
          670  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-drawcross"><B>-drawcross</B></A></DT>
          671  +<DD>
          672  +
          673  +Specifies how the cross used to expand or collapse the children of a node
          674  +should be drawn. 
          675  +Must be one of <B>auto</B>, <B>always</B> or <B>never</B>.
          676  +<BR>If <B>auto</B>, the cross is drawn only if the node has children.
          677  +If <B>always</B>, the cross is always drawn.
          678  +If <B>never</B>, the cross is never drawn.
          679  +To maintain compatibility with older versions of this widget,
          680  +<B>allways</B> is a deprecated synonym to <B>always</B>.
          681  +
          682  +</DD>
          683  +</DL>
          684  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT>
          685  +<DD>
          686  +
          687  +Specifies the foreground color of the label of the node.
          688  +
          689  +</DD>
          690  +</DL>
          691  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-font"><B>-font</B></A></DT>
          692  +<DD>
          693  +
          694  +Specifies a font for the label of the node.
          695  +
          696  +</DD>
          697  +</DL>
          698  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpcmd"><B>-helpcmd</B></A></DT>
          699  +<DD>
          700  +
          701  +If specified, refers to a command to execute to get the help text to display.
          702  +The command must return a string to display.
          703  +If the command returns an empty string, no help is displayed. 
          704  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          705  +</DD>
          706  +</DL>
          707  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
          708  +<DD>
          709  +
          710  +Text for dynamic help.
          711  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          712  +</DD>
          713  +</DL>
          714  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
          715  +<DD>
          716  +Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
          717  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          718  +</DD>
          719  +</DL>
          720  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
          721  +<DD>
          722  +Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
          723  +See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
          724  +</DD>
          725  +</DL>
          726  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT>
          727  +<DD>
          728  +
          729  +Specifies an image to display at the left of the label of the node.
          730  +<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
          731  +</DD>
          732  +</DL>
          733  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-open"><B>-open</B></A></DT>
          734  +<DD>
          735  +
          736  +Specifies wether or not the children of the node should be drawn.
          737  +
          738  +</DD>
          739  +</DL>
          740  +<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
          741  +<DD>
          742  +
          743  +Specifies the distance between image or window and the text of the node.  If
          744  +the value is -1, the node will be drawn with the padx for the entire tree.
          745  +
          746  +</DD>
          747  +</DL>
          748  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-selectable"><B>-selectable</B></A></DT>
          749  +<DD>
          750  +
          751  +Specifies if the node can be selected or not.
          752  +
          753  +</DD>
          754  +</DL>
          755  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
          756  +<DD>
          757  +
          758  +Specifies the label of the node.
          759  +
          760  +</DD>
          761  +</DL>
          762  +<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT>
          763  +<DD>
          764  +
          765  +Specifies a pathname to display at the left of the label of the node.
          766  +<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
          767  +</DD>
          768  +</DL>
          769  +</DD></DL>
          770  +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
          771  + <I>node</I>
          772  + <I>option</I>
          773  +</DT><DD>
          774  +
          775  +Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
          776  +<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
          777  +
          778  +</DD></DL>
          779  +<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
          780  + <I>node</I>
          781  + ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
          782  +</DT><DD>
          783  +
          784  +This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
          785  +options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
          786  +the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
          787  +item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
          788  +in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
          789  +returns a list describing the current options for the item.
          790  +Read-only options are not be modified.
          791  +
          792  +</DD></DL>
          793  +<DL><DT><A NAME="line"><I>pathName</I> <B>line</B></A>
          794  + <I>node</I>
          795  +</DT><DD>
          796  +
          797  +<p>
          798  +Returns the line number where <I>node</I> was drawn.  If the node is
          799  +not visible then return -1.  The first line of the tree has the value
          800  +of 0.
          801  +</p>
          802  +
          803  +</DD></DL>
          804  +<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A>
          805  + <I>parent</I>
          806  + <I>node</I>
          807  + <I>index</I>
          808  +</DT><DD>
          809  +
          810  +Moves <I>node</I> to the children list of <I>parent</I> at position <I>index</I>.
          811  +<I>parent</I> can not be a descendant of <I>node</I>.
          812  +
          813  +</DD></DL>
          814  +<DL><DT><A NAME="nodes"><I>pathName</I> <B>nodes</B></A>
          815  + <I>node</I>
          816  + ?<I>first</I>?
          817  + ?<I>last</I>?
          818  +</DT><DD>
          819  +
          820  +Returns parts of the children of <I>node</I>, following <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>.<BR>
          821  +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all children.
          822  +If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the child at index
          823  +<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
          824  +If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
          825  +are all of the children between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
          826  +inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
          827  +forms for indices.
          828  +
          829  +</DD></DL>
          830  +<DL><DT><A NAME="opentree"><I>pathName</I> <B>opentree</B></A> <I>node</I> ?<I>recurse</I>?
          831  +
          832  +</DT><DD>
          833  +
          834  +This command open all the subtree given by <I>node</I>. Recurse through the
          835  +tree starting at <I>node</I> and set <B>open</B> option to 1 depending on value
          836  +of <I>recurse</I>. Default value of <I>recurse</I> is <I>true</I>.
          837  +
          838  +</DD></DL>
          839  +<DL><DT><A NAME="parent"><I>pathName</I> <B>parent</B></A>
          840  + <I>node</I>
          841  +</DT><DD>
          842  +
          843  +Returns the parent of <I>node</I>.
          844  +
          845  +</DD></DL>
          846  +<DL><DT><A NAME="reorder"><I>pathName</I> <B>reorder</B></A>
          847  + <I>node</I>
          848  + <I>neworder</I>
          849  +</DT><DD>
          850  +
          851  +Modifies the order of children of <I>node</I> given by <I>neworder</I>. Children of
          852  +<I>node</I> that do not appear in <I>neworder</I> are no moved.
          853  +
          854  +</DD></DL>
          855  +<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
          856  + <I>node</I>
          857  +</DT><DD>
          858  +
          859  +Arrange the scrolling area to make <I>node</I> visible.
          860  +
          861  +</DD></DL>
          862  +<DL><DT><A NAME="selection"><I>pathName</I> <B>selection</B></A>
          863  + <I>cmd</I>
          864  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          865  +</DT><DD>
          866  +
          867  +Modifies the list of selected nodes following <I>cmd</I>:
          868  +<DL>
          869  +<DT><B>add</B>
          870  +<DD>Adds all nodes in <I>arg</I> to the selection.
          871  +<DT><B>clear</B>
          872  +<DD>Removes all nodes from the selection.
          873  +<DT><B>get</B>
          874  +<DD>Returns a list containing the indices of current selected nodes.
          875  +<DT><B>includes</B>
          876  +<DD>Tests if the specified node is selected. Returns true if the answer is yes, and false else.
          877  +<DT><B>range</B>
          878  +<DD>Sets the selection to all nodes between the two specified ones.
          879  +<DT><B>remove</B>
          880  +<DD>Removes all nodes in <I>arg</I> from the selection.
          881  +<DT><B>set</B>
          882  +<DD>Sets the selection to all nodes in <I>arg</I>.
          883  +<DT><B>toggle</B>
          884  +<DD>Toggles the selection status of all nodes in <I>arg</I>.
          885  +</DL>
          886  +
          887  +The subcommands <B>add</B>, <B>range</B>, and <B>set</B> silently
          888  +ignore nodes which are declared unselectable. See the node option
          889  +<a href="#Node-selectable">-selectable</a> to influence this.
          890  +
          891  +</DD></DL>
          892  +
          893  +</DD></DL>
          894  +
          895  +<DL><DT><A NAME="toggle"><I>pathName</I> <B>toggle</B></A>
          896  + <I>node</I>
          897  +</DT><DD>
          898  +    Toggle the open/close status of the given <i>node</i>.
          899  +</DD></DL>
          900  +
          901  +<DL><DT><A NAME="visible"><I>pathName</I> <B>visible</B></A>
          902  + <I>node</I>
          903  +</DT><DD>
          904  +
          905  +Returns whether or not <I>node</I> is visible (all its parents are open).
          906  +
          907  +</DD></DL>
          908  +<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A>
          909  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          910  +</DT><DD>
          911  +
          912  +Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
          913  +
          914  +</DD></DL>
          915  +<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A>
          916  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
          917  +</DT><DD>
          918  +
          919  +Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
          920  +
          921  +</DD></DL>
          922  +
          923  +<B><A NAME="nodes">BINDINGS</A></B><BR>
          924  +
          925  +<p>
          926  +A <b>&lt;&lt;TreeSelect&gt;&gt;</b> virtual event is generated any time the
          927  +selection in the tree changes.  This is the default behavior of an
          928  +item in the tree, but it can be overridden with the bindText or
          929  +bindImage command.  If the button 1 binding is overridden, this event may
          930  +not be generated.
          931  +</p>
          932  +
          933  +<p>
          934  +The tree has all the standard mouse wheel bindings when it has focus.
          935  +</p>
          936  +
          937  +</BODY></HTML>

Added bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Widget.html.

            1  +<HTML>
            2  +<HEAD><TITLE>Widget</TITLE></HEAD>
            3  +<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
            4  +<IMG SRC="constr.gif" WIDTH="40" HEIGHT="40"> Under construction ...<BR>
            5  +<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
            6  +<DD><B>Widget</B>
            7  + - The Widget base class
            8  +</DD></DL>
            9  +<DL>
           10  +<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
           11  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#addmap"><B>addmap</B></A>
           12  + <I>class</I>
           13  + <I>subclass</I>
           14  + <I>subpath</I>
           15  + <I>options</I>
           16  +</DD>
           17  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#bwinclude"><B>bwinclude</B></A>
           18  + <I>class</I>
           19  + <I>subclass</I>
           20  + <I>subpath</I>
           21  + ?<I>arg...</I>?
           22  +</DD>
           23  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
           24  + <I>path</I>
           25  + <I>option</I>
           26  +</DD>
           27  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
           28  + <I>path</I>
           29  + <I>options</I>
           30  +</DD>
           31  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#create"><B>create</B></A>
           32  + <I>class</I>
           33  + <I>path</I>
           34  + ?<I>rename</I>?
           35  +</DD>
           36  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#declare"><B>declare</B></A>
           37  + <I>class</I>
           38  + <I>optlist</I>
           39  +</DD>
           40  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#define"><B>define</B></A>
           41  + <I>class</I>
           42  + <I>filename</I>
           43  + ?<I>class ...</I>?
           44  +</DD>
           45  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#destroy"><B>destroy</B></A>
           46  + <I>path</I>
           47  +</DD>
           48  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#focusNext"><B>focusNext</B></A>
           49  + <I>w</I>
           50  +</DD>
           51  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#focusOK"><B>focusOK</B></A>
           52  + <I>w</I>
           53  +</DD>
           54  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#focusPrev"><B>focusPrev</B></A>
           55  + <I>w</I>
           56  +</DD>
           57  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#generate-doc"><B>generate-doc</B></A>
           58  + <I>dir</I>
           59  + <I>widgetlist</I>
           60  +</DD>
           61  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#generate-widget-doc"><B>generate-widget-doc</B></A>
           62  + <I>class</I>
           63  + <I>iscmd</I>
           64  + <I>file</I>
           65  +</DD>
           66  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#getoption"><B>getoption</B></A>
           67  + <I>path</I>
           68  + <I>option</I>
           69  +</DD>
           70  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#getVariable"><B>getVariable</B></A>
           71  + <I>path</I>
           72  + <I>varName</I>
           73  + <I>?myVarName?</I>
           74  +</DD>
           75  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#hasChanged"><B>hasChanged</B></A>
           76  + <I>path</I>
           77  + <I>option</I>
           78  + <I>pvalue</I>
           79  +</DD>
           80  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#init"><B>init</B></A>
           81  + <I>class</I>
           82  + <I>path</I>
           83  + <I>options</I>
           84  +</DD>
           85  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#setoption"><B>setoption</B></A>
           86  + <I>path</I>
           87  + <I>option</I>
           88  + <I>value</I>
           89  +</DD>
           90  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#subcget"><B>subcget</B></A>
           91  + <I>path</I>
           92  + <I>subwidget</I>
           93  +</DD>
           94  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#syncoptions"><B>syncoptions</B></A>
           95  + <I>class</I>
           96  + <I>subclass</I>
           97  + <I>subpath</I>
           98  + <I>options</I>
           99  +</DD>
          100  +<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#tkinclude"><B>tkinclude</B></A>
          101  + <I>class</I>